MP 2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054 Operation - RFG

Read This First
Manuals Provided with This Machine
Safety Information for This Machine
Other Information for This Machine
Appendix
For information not found in paper manuals,
see the online manuals available on our web
site (http://www.ricoh.com/downloads/) or
via Smart Operation Panel.
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 2
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................2
Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Machine Types............................................................................................................................................... 3
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine................................................................................................................................. 5
Manuals List.................................................................................................................................................... 7
How to Use the Operating Instructions............................................................................................................. 9
Formats of the Operating Instructions........................................................................................................... 9
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Safety Information............................................................................................................................................ 11
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................................................11
Safety Precautions to Be Followed............................................................................................................. 11
Safety Labels of This Machine.........................................................................................................................18
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels.........................................................................................18
Power Switch Symbols.................................................................................................................................21
3. Other Information for This Machine
Laws and Regulations...................................................................................................................................... 23
Duplication and Printing Prohibited............................................................................................................ 23
Laser Safety.................................................................................................................................................. 23
Notes to USA Users of FCC Requirements................................................................................................ 24
Important Safety Instructions for Facsimile Unit......................................................................................... 27
Notes to Canadian Users of IC Rules.........................................................................................................27
Notes to Canadian Users of Facsimile Unit............................................................................................... 28
4. Appendix
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 29
1
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
Indicates instructions displayed on the Smart Operation Panel.
Indicates instructions in sheet form.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model-Specific Information",
Getting Started .
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
2
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Machine Types
Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.
• Type 1: MP 2554SP/MP 2554SPG
• Type 2: MP 3054SP/MP 3054SPG
• Type 3: MP 3554SP/MP 3554SPG
• Type 4: MP 4054SP/MP 4054SPG
• Type 5: MP 5054SP/MP 5054SPG
• Type 6: MP 6054SP/MP 6054SPG
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
3
4
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
This chapter explains manuals for this machine.
Manuals for This Machine
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine.
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
• Media differ according to manual.
• Adobe® Reader® must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
User Guide
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting when an
error message appears, etc., summaries are provided below for each user manual.
Read This First
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information. It
also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
Start Guide
Describes how to read manuals on the Smart Operation Panel. It also describes how to log in to the
machine.
Easy Search
You can search for a description by what you want to do. Also, this machine's distinctive functions
are explained.
Getting Started
Describes preparations for using the machine, operating instructions, and character input methods.
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Describes how to load originals and sheets and about their specifications.
Convenient Functions
Describes how to register frequently used settings, customize the Home Screen, and display a Web
page on the control panel. It also describes how to manage a job.
Maintenance and Specifications
Describes how to replace supplies and how to install and clean this machine. It also describes the
specifications of the main unit and options.
5
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide for resolving common usage-related problems.
Copy/ Document Server
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to specify the settings for originals.
Fax
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
Print
Describes how to print using the printer driver. It also describes the functions available for printing.
Scan
Describes how to scan paper data using this machine and how to send the scanned data to a
computer and store the data.
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings
Explains how to connect the machine to a network, and configure and operate the machine in a
network environment. Also explains how to change User Tools settings and how to register
information in the Address Book.
PostScript 3
Explains how to set up and use PostScript® 3TM.
Extended Feature Settings
Describes how to configure the extended features using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.
Security Guide
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator.
For details, see "Before Using This Machine", Security Guide .
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.
Other Manuals
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference FAX Guide
6
Manuals for This Machine
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
• Appendix
• DHCP Option 204
• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
• Information for users of the standard operation panel:
• You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an IT
security certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from http://support-download.com/
services/device/ccmanual/mp_2554_3054_3554_4054_5054_6054/en/
download_admin.html and http://support-download.com/services/device/ccmanual/
mp_2554_3054_3554_4054_5054_6054/en/download_user.html. This information is
about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified machine, be sure to
read it before operating the machine so you can make the correct settings before using it.
Manuals List
Printed
Manuals
Provided
HTML
Manuals
Provided
Manuals
displayed on
the Smart
Operation
Panel
PDF Manuals
Provided
User Guide
Yes
No
No
Yes
Read This First
Yes
No
No
Yes
Start Guide
Yes
No
No
No
Easy Search
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Getting Started
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Convenient Functions
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Maintenance and Specifications
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Troubleshooting
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Copy/ Document Server
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Manual Name
7
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Printed
Manuals
Provided
HTML
Manuals
Provided
Manuals
displayed on
the Smart
Operation
Panel
Fax
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Print
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Scan
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Connecting the Machine/
System Settings
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
PostScript 3
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Extended Feature Settings
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
No
Security Guide
No
Yes
Yes
No
Driver Installation Guide
No
No
No
Yes *1
Quick Reference Copy Guide
No
No
No
Yes
Quick Reference FAX Guide
No
No
No
Yes
Quick Reference Scanner Guide
No
No
No
Yes
Manual Name
PDF Manuals
Provided
*1 These manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
8
How to Use the Operating Instructions
How to Use the Operating Instructions
This chapter describes the operating instructions of this machine.
Formats of the Operating Instructions
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:
• Printed manuals
• HTML manuals
• Manuals displayed on the Smart Operation Panel
• PDF manuals
For details about the contents of each manual, see page 5 "Manuals for This Machine". The various
manuals are available in different formats. For details about availability, see page 7 "Manuals List".
For details about how to read HTML and PDF manuals, please visit our Web site or consult an
authorized dealer.
For details about how to read the manuals on the Smart Operation Panel, see Start Guide
.
• Recommended browsers:
• Internet Explorer 8 or 9
• Firefox 22
• Safari 5.1.7
• Chrome 28
• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• Required display resolution is 1024 × 768 pixel or greater.
• To view the PDF manuals, you need to have Adobe Reader installed on your computer.
9
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
10
2. Safety Information for This Machine
This chapter describes the safety precautions.
Safety Information
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death
or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor
or moderate injury or damage to property.
Safety Precautions to Be Followed
This section explains safety precautions that should always be followed when using this machine.
Environments where the machine can be used
This section explains safety precautions about environments where the machine can be used.
• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might
occur.
11
2. Safety Information for This Machine
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might
occur.
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine to topple over,
possibly resulting in injury.
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
Handling power cords and power cord plugs
This section explains safety precautions about handling power cords and power cord plugs.
• Do not use any power sources other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so
could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use any frequencies other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use multi-socket adaptors. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use extension cords. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use power cords that are damaged, broken, or modified. Also, do not use power cords
that have been trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or bent severely. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• The supplied power cord is for use with this machine only. Do not use it with other appliances.
Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
12
Safety Information
• If the power cord is damaged and its inner wires are exposed or broken, contact your service
representative for a replacement. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to push the plug of the power cord fully into the wall outlet. Partially inserted plugs
create an unstable connection that can result in unsafe buildup of heat.
• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.
13
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Handling the main machine
This section explains safety precautions about handling the main machine.
• Be sure to locate the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet. This will allow easy
disconnection of the power cord in the event of an emergency.
• If the machine emits smoke or odours, or if it behaves unusually, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• If metal objects, or water or other fluids fall inside this machine, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity. Doing so could
result in electric shock.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on
the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly
resulting in injury.
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.
• If the lower paper tray is installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time when you are
changing or replenishing paper or resolving paper jams. Pressing down forcefully on the
machine's upper surfaces can result in malfunctions and/or user injury.
14
Safety Information
• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction
and risk of injury to users.
• Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.
• Do not hold the control panel while moving the machine. Doing so may damage the control
panel, cause a malfunction, or result in injury.
• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.
Handling the machine's interior
This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's interior.
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in this manual. Inside
this machine are high voltage components that are an electric shock hazard and laser
components that could cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any of the
machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or repair.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so risks burns and electric shock.
Note again that exposure to the laser components inside this machine risks blindness.
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when removing misfed paper, pulling out or
pushing in the finisher's staple unit. You can trap and injure your fingers if you do not.
• While safety measures have been installed to prevent accidents, you must not touch the
machine's rollers while it is operating. Doing so could cause injury.
15
2. Safety Information for This Machine
• If the machine's interior is not cleaned regularly, dust will accumulate. Fire and breakdown can
result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this machine. Contact your sales or service
representative for details about and charges for cleaning the machine's interior.
Handling the machine's supplies
This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's supplies.
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
16
Safety Information
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.
• Do not attempt to print on stapled sheets, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of
conductive paper. Doing so risks fire.
• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.
17
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Safety Labels of This Machine
This section explains the machine's safety information labels.
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels
This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety,
please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.
Main unit
1
DCK001
1.
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the machine could be very hot. Caution should be
taken when removing misfed paper.
18
Safety Labels of This Machine
Paper trays
1
2
DCK002
1 and 2.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.
Finisher SR3140 or Booklet Finisher SR3150
3
1
2
DCK003
1.
19
2. Safety Information for This Machine
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper revolve. Take care not to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
2.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not. Take care not to touch the booklet
finisher tray during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
3.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.
Finisher SR3160 or Booklet Finisher SR3170
3
1
2
4
DCK004
1 and 3.
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper revolve. Take care not to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
2.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not. Take care not to touch the booklet
finisher tray during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
4.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.
20
Safety Labels of This Machine
Internal Finisher SR3180
1
DCK005
1.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.
Power Switch Symbols
The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows:
•
: POWER ON
•
: STANDBY
21
2. Safety Information for This Machine
22
3. Other Information for This Machine
This chapter describes laws and regulations related to this machine.
Laws and Regulations
Duplication and Printing Prohibited
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
This machine is equipped with a function that prevents making counterfeit bank bills. Due to this function
the original images similar to bank bills may not be copied properly.
Laser Safety
Laser Safety for Type 1, 2, and 3
CDRH Regulations
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR Subchapter J for class I laser product. This
equipment contains one AlGaInP laser diode, 660 nanometer wavelength. The beam divergence angle
is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the vertical direction, and 7 degrees (minimum)
and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and laser beams are generated in Continuous
Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power of the light source is 10 milliwatt.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Laser Safety for Type 4, 5, and 6
CDRH Regulations
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR Subchapter J for class I laser product. This
equipment contains two AlGaInP laser diodes, 660 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. The beam
divergence angle is 15 degrees (minimum) and 25 degrees (maximum) in the vertical direction, and 7
23
3. Other Information for This Machine
degrees (minimum) and 13 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and laser beams are
generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power of the light source is 15
milliwatt.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes to USA Users of FCC Requirements
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment should
be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
24
Laws and Regulations
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Responsible party: Ricoh Americas Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
Product Name: Multi Function Peripheral
Model Number:
• MP 2554SP/MP 2554SPG
• MP 3054SP/MP 3054SPG
• MP 3554SP/MP 3554SPG
• MP 4054SP/MP 4054SPG
• MP 5054SP/MP 5054SPG
• MP 6054SP/MP 6054SPG
Installing the Ferrite Core
The USB device server and a telephone line cable with a ferrite core must be used for RF
interference suppression.
Part 68 of the FCC Rules regarding Facsimile Unit
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. On
the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in
the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone
company.
2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
detail.
4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the
local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the
25
3. Other Information for This Machine
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted
service.
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Ricoh Americas Corporation Customer Support Department at 1-800-FASTFIX. If this device is
causing problems with your telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), see
the manual provided with this machine for instruction on resolving the problem.
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission,
public service commission or corporation commission for information.
10. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about
what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other
number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following steps:
Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming chapter of the operating
instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or business. This
information is transmitted with your document by the FAX HEADER feature. In addition to the information,
be sure to program the date and time into your machine.
26
Laws and Regulations
Important Safety Instructions for Facsimile Unit
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a
fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
Save these instructions.
IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité Fax
Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de material téléphonique afin de
réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures. En voici quelques-unes:
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier de
cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
• Éviter d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage électrique. Ceci
peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de la fuite.
• Utiliser seulement le cordon d'alimentation et le type de piles indiqués dans ce manual. Ne pas
jeter les piles dans le feu: elles peuvent exploser. Se conformer aux règlements pertinents quant à
l'élimination des piles.
Conserver ces instructions.
Notes to Canadian Users of IC Rules
Notes to users in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low
27
3. Other Information for This Machine
levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques
(RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée
conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être
installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositive rayonnant et le
corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Notes to Canadian Users of Facsimile Unit
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l'unité Fax
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Industrie Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices d'équivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
28
4. Appendix
This appendix describes trademarks for the machine.
Trademarks
Adobe, PostScript, PostScript 3, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google and Chrome™ browser are trademarks of Google Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 8 and 9 are as follows:
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
29
MEMO
30
MEMO
31
MEMO
32
EN US
D202-7011
© 2014
EN US
D202-7011
User Guide
What You Can Do with This Machine
Getting Started
Copy
Fax
Print
Scan
Document Server
Web Image Monitor
Adding Paper and Toner
Troubleshooting
Information for This Machine
For information not found in paper manuals, see the online manuals available on our
web site
(http://www.ricoh.com/downloads/) .
For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in
"Read This First" before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 7
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................7
Model-Specific Information............................................................................................................................... 8
Names of Major Features.................................................................................................................................. 9
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Searching by What You Want to Do............................................................................................................. 11
Reducing my Costs.......................................................................................................................................11
Using Scanned Files on the Computer....................................................................................................... 12
Registering Destinations...............................................................................................................................13
Operating the Machine More Effectively.................................................................................................. 14
What You Can Do with This Machine............................................................................................................ 15
Customizing the [Home] Screen................................................................................................................. 15
Making Copies Using Various Functions................................................................................................... 16
Printing Data Using Various Functions........................................................................................................17
Utilizing Stored Document.......................................................................................................................... 17
Sending and Receiving Faxes without Paper............................................................................................ 18
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet...........................................................................................20
Sending and Receiving Faxes by Using the Machine without Fax Unit Installed................................... 21
Using the Facsimile and the Scanner in a Network Environment.............................................................22
Embedding Text Information in Scanned Files...........................................................................................22
Preventing Information Leakage (Security Functions)............................................................................... 23
Centrally Controlling Scan Conditions and Distribution........................................................................... 24
Monitoring and Setting the Machine Using a Computer......................................................................... 24
Preventing Unauthorized Copying............................................................................................................. 25
2. Getting Started
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................27
Guide to Components
(mainly Europe)................................................................................. 27
Guide to Components
(mainly Asia)......................................................................................30
Guide to Components
(mainly North America).................................................................... 33
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options................................................................................................37
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options.............................................................................37
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the Standard
Operation Panel)..............................................................................................................................................56
1
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the Smart Operation
Panel)................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Changing the Display Language.................................................................................................................... 61
Changing the Display Language (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)......................................... 61
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)......................................... 62
Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel).............................. 63
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)............................................... 68
Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel).................................... 69
Registering Functions in a Program.................................................................................................................73
Example of Programs...................................................................................................................................76
Turning On/Off the Power.............................................................................................................................. 79
Turning On the Main Power........................................................................................................................79
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................79
Logging In the Machine...................................................................................................................................80
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed.......................................................................................... 80
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel.................................................................................. 80
Logging In Using the Control Panel (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)............................... 80
Logging In Using the Control Panel (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)..................................... 81
Logging Out Using the Control Panel (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)............................82
Logging Out Using the Control Panel (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)..................................82
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................83
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
(mainly Europe).................................................. 83
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
(mainly Asia)....................................................... 83
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
(mainly North America)......................................84
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder....................................................................................... 85
3. Copy
Basic Procedure................................................................................................................................................87
Auto Reduce / Enlarge....................................................................................................................................89
Duplex Copying............................................................................................................................................... 91
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation......................................................................................... 93
Combined Copying......................................................................................................................................... 95
One-Sided Combine................................................................................................................................... 96
Two-Sided Combine....................................................................................................................................97
2
Copying onto Custom Size Paper from the Bypass Tray............................................................................100
Copying onto Envelopes...............................................................................................................................101
Copying onto Envelopes from the Bypass Tray...................................................................................... 101
Copying onto Envelopes from the Paper Tray........................................................................................ 102
Sort..................................................................................................................................................................103
Changing the Number of Sets..................................................................................................................104
Storing Data in the Document Server...........................................................................................................106
4. Fax
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)....................................................................... 107
Sending Originals Using the Exposure Glass (Memory Transmission).................................................109
Registering a Fax Destination................................................................................................................... 110
Deleting a Fax Destination........................................................................................................................111
Transmitting while Checking Connection to Destination (Immediate Transmission).................................113
Sending Originals Using the Exposure Glass (Immediate Transmission)............................................. 114
Canceling a Transmission............................................................................................................................. 116
Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned....................................................................116
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned.......................................................... 116
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned.......................................................................117
Storing a Document....................................................................................................................................... 119
Sending Stored Documents...................................................................................................................... 120
Printing the Journal Manually....................................................................................................................... 122
5. Print
Quick Install....................................................................................................................................................123
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties........................................................................................................124
Standard Printing........................................................................................................................................... 125
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 125
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets................................................................................................................... 126
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 126
Types of Two-sided Printing......................................................................................................................126
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page............................................................................................... 127
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 127
Types of Combine Printing........................................................................................................................ 127
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 129
3
Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel........................................................................ 129
Printing on Envelopes Using the Printer Driver........................................................................................ 130
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server.........................................................................................131
Storing Documents in Document Server.................................................................................................. 131
Managing Documents Stored in Document Server................................................................................ 132
6. Scan
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder............................................................................................. 133
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Windows/Confirming a Computer's Information.....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Registering an SMB Folder.......................................................................................................................136
Deleting an SMB Registered Folder.........................................................................................................140
Entering the Path to the Destination Manually........................................................................................ 141
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail......................................................................................142
Registering an E-mail Destination.............................................................................................................143
Deleting an E-mail Destination................................................................................................................. 145
Entering an E-mail Address Manually..................................................................................................... 146
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files........................................................................................................ 147
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List......................................................................................... 148
Specifying the File Type................................................................................................................................ 150
Specifying Scan Settings............................................................................................................................... 151
7. Document Server
Storing Data................................................................................................................................................... 153
Printing Stored Documents............................................................................................................................ 155
8. Web Image Monitor
Displaying Top Page..................................................................................................................................... 157
9. Adding Paper and Toner
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................159
Precautions for Loading Paper................................................................................................................. 159
Loading Paper into Paper Trays............................................................................................................... 159
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray........................................................................................................ 160
Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer Function........................................................................162
Loading Paper into Tray 3 (LCT).............................................................................................................. 166
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)................................................................................ 168
4
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper........................................................................... 169
Recommended Paper.................................................................................................................................... 172
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types................................................................................................... 172
Adding Toner................................................................................................................................................. 183
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out...................................................... 184
Disposing of Used Toner...........................................................................................................................185
10. Troubleshooting
When a Status Icon Is Displayed..................................................................................................................187
When the Indicator Lamp for the [Check Status] Key Is Lit or Flashing..................................................... 188
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound.............................................................................................190
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine...................................................................................191
When Multiple Functions Cannot Be Executed Simultaneously............................................................ 195
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function........................................... 197
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function.....................................................................201
When Network Setting Problems Occur................................................................................................. 202
When the Remote Fax Function Cannot Be Used...................................................................................208
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function..........................................................................211
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Printer Function..................................211
Messages Printed on the Error Logs or Reports When You Use the Printer Function...........................214
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function...................................................................... 225
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Scanner Function.............................. 225
Messages Displayed on the Client Computer.........................................................................................235
When Other Messages Appear...................................................................................................................241
When There Is a Problem Scanning or Storing Originals...................................................................... 243
When the Home Screen Cannot Be Edited (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)................ 243
When the Address Book Is Updated....................................................................................................... 244
When Data Cannot Be Sent Due to a Problem with the Destination.....................................................245
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated Due to a Problem with the User Certificate.......................245
When Problems Occur While Logging In............................................................................................... 247
When the User Lacks Privileges to Perform an Operation..................................................................... 247
When the LDAP Server Cannot Be Used.................................................................................................248
11. Information for This Machine
Information on Environmental Regulations.................................................................................................. 249
5
ENERGY STAR Program........................................................................................................................... 249
Energy Saving Functions...........................................................................................................................249
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(mainly Europe)...................... 252
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
(mainly Europe)
.................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Environmental Advice for Users
(mainly Europe)............................................................... 254
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)
(mainly North America)....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 255
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................257
6
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see page 8 "Model-Specific
Information".
7
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
DCG004
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27, -29, -64, -65, -67, -69
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -57, -58
• 120–127 V
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -27, -64, -65, -67" is printed on the label,
see "
(mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -29, -69" is printed on the label, see
"
(mainly Asia)" also.
8
Names of Major Features
In this manual, major features of the machine are referred to as follows:
• Auto Reverse Document Feeder
• Auto Document Feeder
scanning ADF)
• Large Capacity Tray
ARDF
ADF (in this manual, "ADF" refers to the ARDF and the one-pass duplex
LCT
9
10
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
You can search for a description by what you want to do.
Searching by What You Want to Do
You can search for a procedure by what you want to do.
Reducing my Costs
BRL059S
Printing multi-page documents on both sides of sheets (Duplex Copy)
See "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
Printing multi-page documents and received faxes on a single sheet (Combine (Copier/Fax))
See "Combined Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
See "Combine Two Originals", Fax.
Printing received faxes on both sides of sheets (2 Sided Print)
See "Two-Sided Printing", Fax.
Converting received faxes to electronic formats (Paperless Fax)
See "Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents", Fax.
Sending files from the computer without printing them (LAN-Fax)
See "Sending Fax Documents from Computers", Fax.
11
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Checking how much paper is saved ([Information] screen)
See "How to Use the [Information] Screen", Getting Started.
Reducing electricity consumption
See "Saving Energy", Getting Started.
See "Timer Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
Using Scanned Files on the Computer
BQX138S
Sending scan files
See "Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scan.
Sending the URL of the folder in which scan files are stored
See "Sending the URL by E-mail", Scan.
Storing scan files in a shared folder
See "Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder", Scan.
Storing scan files on media
See "Basic Procedure for Saving Scan Files on a Memory Storage Device", Scan.
Embedding text information in scanned files
See "Embedding Text Information in Scanned Data", Scan.
Converting transmitted faxes to electronic formats and sending them to a computer
See "Overview of Folder Transmission Function", Fax.
12
Searching by What You Want to Do
Managing and using documents converted to electronic formats (Document Server)
See "Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions", Copy/ Document Server.
Registering Destinations
BRL060S
Using the control panel to register destinations in the Address Book
See "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book", Fax.
See "Registering a destination in the address book manually", Scan.
Using Web Image Monitor to register destinations from a computer
See "Registering Internet Fax Destination Information Using Web Image Monitor", Fax.
Downloading destinations registered in the machine to the LAN-Fax driver destination list
See "Using the machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax destination list", Fax.
13
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Operating the Machine More Effectively
BQX139S
Registering and using frequently-used settings (Program)
See "Registering Functions in a Program", Convenient Functions.
Registering frequently-used settings as initial settings (Program as Defaults (Copier/Document
Server/FAX/Scanner))
See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient Functions.
Registering frequently-used printing settings to the printer driver
See "Using One Click Presets", Print.
Changing the initial settings of the printer driver to frequently-used printing settings
See "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box", Print.
Adding shortcuts to frequently used programs or Web pages
See "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)",
Convenient Functions.
See "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)", Convenient
Functions.
Changing the order of the function and shortcut icons
See "Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation
Panel)", Convenient Functions.
See "Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation
Panel)", Convenient Functions.
14
What You Can Do with This Machine
What You Can Do with This Machine
This section describes the features of this machine.
Customizing the [Home] Screen
The icons of each function are displayed on the [Home] screen.
CUM001
• You can add shortcuts to often used programs or Web pages to the [Home] screen. The programs
or Web pages can be recalled easily by pressing the shortcut icons.
• You can display only the icons of functions and shortcuts that you use.
• You can change the order of the function and shortcut icons.
• For details about the features on the [Home] screen, see "How to Use the [Home] Screen (When
Using the Standard Operation Panel)" and "How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart
Operation Panel)", Getting Started.
• For details about how to customize the [Home] screen, see "Types of [Home] Screens and How to
Customize Them (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)" and "How to Customize the [Home]
Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)", Convenient Functions.
15
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Making Copies Using Various Functions
CJQ601
• You can print stamps on copies. Stamps can include background numbers, scanned images, dates,
page numbers, and texts.
See "Stamps", Copy/ Document Server.
• You can reduce or enlarge the copy image. Auto Reduce / Enlarge function enables the machine
to detect the original size automatically. Also, it enables the machine to select an appropriate
reproduction ratio based on the paper size you specify. If the orientation of the original is different
from that of the paper you are copying onto, the machine rotates the original image by 90 degrees
to match it with the copy paper.
See "Reducing or Enlarging Originals", Copy/ Document Server.
• Copier functions such as Duplex, Combine, Booklet, and Magazine allow you to save on paper by
copying multiple pages onto single sheets.
For details about duplex copying, see "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
For details about combined copying, see "Combined Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
For details about the booklet and magazine functions, see "Booklet/Magazine", Copy/
Document Server.
• You can copy onto various types of paper such as envelopes and OHP transparencies.
See "Copying onto Various Types of Paper", Copy/ Document Server.
• The finisher allows you to sort, staple, and punch holes in your copies.
See "Finishing", Copy/ Document Server.
16
What You Can Do with This Machine
Printing Data Using Various Functions
CJQ614
• This machine supports network and local connections.
• You can print or delete print jobs stored on the machine's hard disk, which have been previously
sent from computers using the printer driver. The following types of print jobs can be selected:
Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
See "Storing Documents in the Hard Disk Drive and Printing Them", Print.
• The finisher allows you to collate, staple, and punch holes in your prints.
For details about stapling, see "Staple", Print.
• You can print files stored on a removable memory device and specify print conditions such as print
quality and print size.
See "Direct Printing from a Memory Storage Device", Print.
Utilizing Stored Document
You can store files scanned in copier, facsimile, printer, or scanner mode on the machine's hard disk.
Web Image Monitor allows you to use your computer to search for, view, print, delete, and send stored
files via the network. You can also change print settings and print multiple documents (Document Server).
17
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
CJQ603
• You can retrieve stored documents scanned in scanner mode to your computer.
• Using the file format converter, you can download documents stored in copier, Document Server,
or printer mode to your computer.
• For details about how to use the Document Server, see "Storing Data in the Document Server",
Copy/ Document Server.
• For details about the Document Server in copier mode, see "Document Server", Copy/ Document
Server.
• For details about the Document Server in printer mode, see "Saving and Printing Using the
Document Server", Print.
• For details about the Document Server in fax mode, see "Storing a Document", Fax.
• For details about the Document Server in scanner mode, see "Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents", Scan.
Sending and Receiving Faxes without Paper
Reception
You can store and save received fax documents as electronic formats in the machine's hard disk
without printing them.
18
What You Can Do with This Machine
CJQ604
You can use Web Image Monitor to check, print, delete, retrieve, or download documents using
your computer (Storing received documents).
• See "Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents", Fax.
Transmission
You can send a fax from your computer over the network (Ethernet or wireless LAN) to this
machine, which then forwards the fax via its telephone connection (LAN-Fax).
CJQ605
• To send a fax, print from the Windows application you are working with, select LAN-Fax as
the printer, and then specify the destination.
• You can also check the sent image data.
19
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
• For details about the machine's settings, see "Network Settings Requirements", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about how to use the function, see "Sending Fax Documents from Computers", Fax.
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet
xxx@xxx.com
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx@xxx.com
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
CJQ606
E-mail Transmission and Reception
This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format, and transmits and receives the
e-mail data over the Internet.
• To send a document, specify an e-mail address instead of dialing the destination telephone
number (Internet Fax and e-mail transmission).
See "Specifying an Internet Fax Destination by Entering It Manually", Fax.
• This machine can receive e-mail messages via Internet Fax or from computers (Internet Fax
Reception and Mail to Print).
See "Receiving E-mail by Internet Fax/Mail to Print", Fax.
• Internet Fax compatible machines and computers that have e-mail addresses can receive email messages via Internet Fax.
IP-Fax
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles directly via a TCP/IP
network.
• To send a document, specify an IP address or host name instead of a fax number (IP-Fax
Transmission).
See "Specifying an IP-Fax Destination by Entering It Manually", Fax.
20
What You Can Do with This Machine
• This machine can receive documents sent via Internet Fax (IP-Fax Reception).
See "Types of Reception", Fax.
• Using a VoIP gateway, this machine can send to G3 facsimiles connected to the public
switched telephone network (PSTN).
• For details about the machine's settings, see "Network Settings Requirements", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
Sending and Receiving Faxes by Using the Machine without Fax Unit Installed
You can send and receive faxes through a different machine's fax functions via a network (Remote Fax).
CJQ612
• To use the remote fax function, install the fax connection unit on the main-machine and submachine.
• The procedure for sending faxes is as same as that of for the machine with the fax unit. When a job
has finished, confirm results displayed on sending history or printed on reports.
• You can forward documents received by the main machine with the facsimile function to submachines.
• For details, see "Sending/Receiving Documents Using a Remote Machine (Remote Fax)", Fax.
21
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Using the Facsimile and the Scanner in a Network Environment
CJQ607
• You can send scan files to a specified destination using e-mail (Sending scan files by e-mail).
See "Overview of E-mail Transmission Function", Fax.
See "Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scan.
• You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan files by Scan to Folder).
See "Overview of Folder Transmission Function", Fax.
See "Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder", Scan.
• You can use Web Services on Devices (WSD) to send scan files to a client computer.
See "Basic Operating Procedure of WSD Scanner (Push Type)", Scan.
Embedding Text Information in Scanned Files
You can extract text information from a scanned document and embed it in the file without using a
computer.
If you scan a document using this function, embedded text can be searched by using the text search
function or copied to another document.
22
What You Can Do with This Machine
CUL003
• To use this function, the OCR unit is required.
• You can select a file type from [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A].
• This function can optically recognize characters in various languages and up to approximately
40,000 characters a page.
• See "Embedding Text Information in Scanned Data", Scan.
Preventing Information Leakage (Security Functions)
CJQ608
• You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from being copied without
permission.
• You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings from being changed
without authorization.
• By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
• You can erase or encrypt the data on the hard disk to minimize the risk of information leakage.
23
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
• You can limit the usage of functions for each user.
• See Security Guide.
Centrally Controlling Scan Conditions and Distribution
You can use the distributed scan management (DSM) system in Windows Server 2008 R2/2012 to
manage the destinations and scan settings for each individual user in a group and to use the information
when distributing scanned data.
You can also use this system to centrally manage information about people using the network and the
machine's scanner functions. Both delivered files and user information can be controlled.
xxx@xxx.xxx
A 600 dpi
600 dpi
A
xxx@xxx.xxx
CUL004
• You must set up and configure a Windows server to use the distributed scan management system.
This system is supported by Windows Server 2008 R2 or later.
• For details about how to deliver files using the distributed scan management system, see
"Managing Scan Conditions and Other Settings in the Block using Distributed Scan Management",
Scan.
Monitoring and Setting the Machine Using a Computer
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the machine's status and change the settings.
24
What You Can Do with This Machine
CJQ609
You can check which tray is running out of paper, register information in the Address Book, specify the
network settings, configure and change the system settings, manage jobs, print the job history, and
configure the authentication settings.
• See "Using Web Image Monitor", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• See Web Image Monitor Help.
Preventing Unauthorized Copying
You can print embedded patterns on printouts to prevent unauthorized copying.
CUM003
25
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
• Using the copier function or the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed document. If
the document is copied on a machine with the Copy Data Security unit, protected pages are
grayed out in the copy. This can minimize the risk of confidential information being copied.
Protected fax messages are grayed out before being transmitted or stored. If a document protected
by unauthorized copy guard is copied on a machine that is equipped with the Copy Data Security
unit, the machine beeps to notify users that unauthorized copying is being attempted.
If the document is copied on a machine without the Copy Data Security Unit, the hidden text
becomes conspicuous in the copy, showing that the copy is unauthorized.
• Using the copier function or the printer driver, you can embed text in the printed document for
unauthorized copy prevention. If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in a Document Server
by a copier or multifunction printer, the embedded text appears conspicuous in the copy,
discouraging such unauthorized copying.
• For details, see the printer driver Help and Security Guide.
• For details about this function in the copier mode, see "Preventing Unauthorized Copies", Copier/
Document Server.
• For details about this function in the printer mode, see "Printing Documents That Are Not Authorized
for Duplication", Print.
26
2. Getting Started
This chapter describes how to start using this machine.
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
Guide to Components
(mainly Europe)
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
Front and left view
5
1
4
2
6
3
7
8
9
DCG001
1. ADF
(The illustration shows the ARDF.)
Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
27
2. Getting Started
3. Vents
Prevent overheating.
4. Control panel
See page 56 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)" or page 59 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel
(When Using the Smart Operation Panel)".
5. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
6. Internal tray 1
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here.
7. Front cover
Open to replace the toner cartridge.
8. Paper trays (Trays 1–2)
Load paper here.
9. Lower paper trays
Load paper here.
28
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
Front and right view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DCG002
1. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.
2. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print on OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper
trays.
3. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
4. Extender
Pull this extender out when loading sheets larger than A4 , 81/2 × 11
in the bypass tray.
5. Vents
Prevent overheating.
29
2. Getting Started
6. Lower right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
7. Right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
Rear and left view
1
1
1
DCG003
1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
Guide to Components
(mainly Asia)
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
30
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
Front and left view
5
1
4
2
6
3
7
8
9
DCG001
1. Exposure glass cover or ADF
(The illustration shows the ARDF.)
Lower the exposure glass cover or the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
3. Vents
Prevent overheating.
4. Control panel
See page 56 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)" or page 59 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel
(When Using the Smart Operation Panel)".
5. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
6. Internal tray 1
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here.
7. Front cover
Open to replace the toner cartridge.
31
2. Getting Started
8. Paper trays (Trays 1–2)
Load paper here.
9. Lower paper trays
Load paper here.
Front and right view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DCG002
1. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.
2. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print on OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper
trays.
3. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
32
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
4. Extender
Pull this extender out when loading sheets larger than A4 , 81/2 × 11
in the bypass tray.
5. Vents
Prevent overheating.
6. Lower right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
7. Right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
Rear and left view
1
1
1
DCG003
1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
Guide to Components
(mainly North America)
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
33
2. Getting Started
Front and left view
5
1
4
2
6
3
7
8
9
DCG001
1. ADF
(The illustration shows the ARDF.)
Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
3. Vents
Prevent overheating.
4. Control panel
See page 56 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)" or page 59 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel
(When Using the Smart Operation Panel)".
5. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
6. Internal tray 1
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here.
7. Front cover
Open to replace the toner cartridge.
34
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
8. Paper trays (Trays 1–2)
Load paper here.
9. Lower paper trays
Load paper here.
Front and right view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DCG002
1. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.
2. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print on OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper
trays.
3. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
35
2. Getting Started
4. Extender
Pull this extender out when loading sheets larger than A4 , 81/2 × 11
in the bypass tray.
5. Vents
Prevent overheating.
6. Lower right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
7. Right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
Rear and left view
1
1
1
DCG003
1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
36
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options
Check which type of machine you have. See Read This First.
(mainly Europe)
External options for Type 1, 2, and 3
11
10
9
13
8
7
6
12
1
5
4
3
2
DCG031
1. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
37
2. Getting Started
2. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
3. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
4. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
5. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
6. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
7. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
8. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
9. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
10. Internal Finisher SR3130
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
11. Internal Finisher SR3180
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper, and staples them without using staples.
12. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
13. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
38
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
External options for Type 1, 2, and 3
(mainly Asia)
14
13
1
2
12
16
11
3
10
9
15
4
8
7
6
5
DCG032
1. Exposure glass cover
Lower this cover over originals.
2. ARDF
Load a stack of originals here. They will feed in automatically.
3. Smart Operation Panel
This control panel is provided with advanced operativity.
4. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
5. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
39
2. Getting Started
6. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
7. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
8. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
9. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
10. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
11. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
12. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
13. Internal Finisher SR3130
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
14. Internal Finisher SR3180
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper, and staples them without using staples.
15. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
16. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
40
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
External options for Type 1, 2, and 3
(mainly North America)
13
12
11
15
1
10
2
9
8
14
3
7
6
5
4
DCG033
1. Smart Operation Panel
This control panel is provided with advanced operativity.
2. Handset
Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed.
Allows you to use the On Hook Dial and Manual Dial functions. It also allows you to use the machine as a
telephone.
3. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
4. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
41
2. Getting Started
5. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
6. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
7. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
8. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
9. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
10. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
11. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
12. Internal Finisher SR3130
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
13. Internal Finisher SR3180
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper, and staples them without using staples.
14. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
15. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
42
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
External options for Type 4 and 5
(mainly Europe)
10
14
9
8
7
13
12
6
1
11
5
4
3
2
DCG034
1. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
2. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
3. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
4. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
5. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
43
2. Getting Started
6. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
7. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
8. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
9. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
10. Internal Finisher SR3130
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
11. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
12. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
13. Finisher SR3160
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
14. Booklet Finisher SR3170
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
44
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
External options for Type 4 and 5
(mainly Asia)
14
2
1
3
18
13
12
4
11
17
16
10
5
15
9
8
7
6
DCG035
1. Exposure glass cover
Lower this cover over originals.
2. One-pass duplex scanning ADF
Load a stack of originals here. They will feed in automatically.
3. ARDF
Load a stack of originals here. They will feed in automatically.
4. Smart Operation Panel
This control panel is provided with advanced operativity.
5. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
6. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
45
2. Getting Started
7. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
8. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
9. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
10. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
11. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
12. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
13. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
14. Internal Finisher SR3130
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
15. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
16. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
17. Finisher SR3160
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
46
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
18. Booklet Finisher SR3170
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
(mainly North America)
External options for Type 4 and 5
12
16
11
1
10
2
9
15
14
8
3
13
7
6
5
4
DCG036
1. Smart Operation Panel
This control panel is provided with advanced operativity.
2. Handset
Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed.
Allows you to use the On Hook Dial and Manual Dial functions. It also allows you to use the machine as a
telephone.
47
2. Getting Started
3. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
4. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
5. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
6. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
7. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
8. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
9. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
10. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
11. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
12. Internal Finisher SR3130
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
13. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
14. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
15. Finisher SR3160
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
48
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
16. Booklet Finisher SR3170
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
External options for Type 6
(mainly Europe)
13
9
8
7
12
11
6
1
10
5
4
3
2
DCG037
1. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
49
2. Getting Started
2. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
3. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
4. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
5. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
6. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
7. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
8. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
9. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
10. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
11. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
12. Finisher SR3160
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
50
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
13. Booklet Finisher SR3170
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
(mainly Asia)
External options for Type 6
14
10
9
1
8
13
12
7
2
11
6
5
4
3
DCG038
1. Smart Operation Panel
This control panel is provided with advanced operativity.
2. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
51
2. Getting Started
3. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
4. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
5. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
6. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
7. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
8. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
9. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
10. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
11. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
12. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
13. Finisher SR3160
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
52
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
14. Booklet Finisher SR3170
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
(mainly North America)
External options for Type 6
15
11
1
10
2
9
14
13
8
3
12
7
6
5
4
DCG039
1. Smart Operation Panel
This control panel is provided with advanced operativity.
2. Handset
Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed.
Allows you to use the On Hook Dial and Manual Dial functions. It also allows you to use the machine as a
telephone.
53
2. Getting Started
3. Lower paper tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper.
4. Caster table for lower paper tray
To use the lower paper tray, attach the caster table.
5. Tray 3 (LCT)
Holds up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 3
(LCT) is in use.
6. Large capacity tray (LCT)
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper.
7. Lower paper trays
Consists of two paper trays. Holds up to 1,100 sheets of paper. Each paper tray holds 550 sheets.
8. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
9. Bridge unit
Relays paper to the finisher.
10. Internal shift tray
Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper.
11. External tray
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here face down.
12. Finisher SR3140
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
13. Booklet Finisher SR3150
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
14. Finisher SR3160
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
54
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
15. Booklet Finisher SR3170
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
55
2. Getting Started
Guide to the Names and Functions of the
Machine's Control Panel (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)
This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully installed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
10
11
19 18
17 16 15 14 13
21
22
12
CUV012
1. [Home] key
Press to display the [Home] screen. For details, see page 62 "How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using
the Standard Operation Panel)"
2. Function keys
No functions are registered to the function keys as a factory default. You can register often used functions,
programs, and Web pages. For details, see "Configuring function keys (when using the standard operation
panel)", Getting Started.
3. Display panel
Displays keys for each function, operation status, or messages. See "Changing Modes (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)" and "How to Use the Screens on the Control Panel", Getting Started.
4. [Reset] key
Press to clear the current settings.
56
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)
5. [Program] key (copier, Document Server, facsimile, and scanner mode)
• Press to register frequently used settings, or to recall registered settings.
See "Registering Frequently Used Functions", Convenient Functions.
• Press to program defaults for the initial display when modes are cleared or reset, or immediately after
the main power switch is turned on.
See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient Functions.
6. [Interrupt] key
Press to make interrupt copies. See "Interrupt Copy", Copy/ Document Server.
7. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch.
8. [Energy Saver] key
Press to switch to and from Sleep mode. See "Saving Energy", Getting Started.
When the machine is in Sleep mode, the [Energy Saver] key flashes slowly.
9. [Login/Logout] key
Press to log in or log out.
10. [User Tools/Counter] key
• User Tools
Press to change the default settings to meet your requirements. See "Accessing User Tools", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• Counter
Press to check or print the counter value. See "Counter", Maintenance and Specifications.
You can find out where to order expendable supplies and where to call when a malfunction occurs. You can
also print these details. See "Checking Inquiry using the User Tools", Maintenance and Specifications.
11. [Simple Screen] key
Press to switch to the simple screen. See "Switching Screen Patterns", Getting Started.
12. [ ] key (Enter key)
Press to confirm values entered or items specified.
13. [Start] key
Press to start copying, printing, scanning, or sending.
14. [Sample Copy] key
Press to make a single set of copies or prints to check print quality before making multiple sets. See "Sample
Copy", Copy/ Document Server.
15. [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
16. [Clear] key
Press to delete a number entered.
17. Number keys
Use to enter the numbers for copies, fax numbers and data for the selected function.
57
2. Getting Started
18. [Check Status] key
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
19. Data In indicator (facsimile and printer mode)
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs or LAN-Fax documents from a computer. See Fax and Print.
20. Communicating indicator, Fax Received indicator, Confidential File indicator
• Communicating indicator
Lights continuously during data transmission and reception.
• Fax Received indicator
Lights continuously while data other than personal box or Memory Lock file is being received and stored
in the fax memory.
See "Substitute Reception", Fax.
• Confidential File indicator
Lights continuously while personal box data is being received.
Flashes while Memory Lock file is being received.
See "Personal Boxes" and "Printing a File Received with Memory Lock", Fax.
21. Media access lamp
Lights up when a memory storage device is inserted in the media slot.
22. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device.
58
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
Guide to the Names and Functions of the
Machine's Control Panel (When Using the
Smart Operation Panel)
1
2
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
10
11
CXV208
1. [Home] key
Press to display the [Home] screen. For details, see page 68 "How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using
the Smart Operation Panel)".
2. Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, shortcuts, and widgets that allow you to navigate the
screens of the various functions and applications and provide you with information about operation status and
other messages. See "How to Use the Standard Applications' Screen (When Using the Smart Operation
Panel)", Getting Started.
3. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch. When the machine is in Sleep
mode, the main power indicator flashes slowly. In Fusing Unit Off mode, the main power indicator is lit.
4. [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
59
2. Getting Started
5. [Check Status] key
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
6. Data In indicator (facsimile and printer mode)
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs or LAN-Fax documents from a computer. See Fax and Print.
7. Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax functions. Flashes during data transmission and reception. Stays lit when
receiving a fax via Confidential or Substitute Reception.
8. [Menu] key
Displays the menu screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications available only on the Smart
Operation Panel are used.
9. [Return] key
Press this key to return to the previous screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications available only
on the Smart Operation Panel are used.
10. Media access lamp
Lights up when a memory storage device is inserted in the media slot.
11. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device.
60
Changing the Display Language
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
1. Display the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CXX005
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on the Home screen 4.
2. Press language key until the language you want to display appears.
3. Close the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
Changing the Display Language (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
1. Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and
then press the Change Languages Widget on the Home screen 4.
2. Select the language you want to display.
3. Press [OK].
61
2. Getting Started
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using
the Standard Operation Panel)
The icons of each function are displayed on the [Home] screen.
You can add shortcuts to frequently used programs or Web pages to the [Home] screen. The icons of
added shortcuts appear on the [Home] screen. The programs or Web pages can be recalled easily by
pressing the shortcut icons.
To display the [Home] screen, press the [Home] key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
8
7
DBG052
1. [Copier]
Press to make copies.
For details about how to use the copy function, see Copy/ Document Server.
2. [Facsimile]
Press to send or receive faxes.
For details about how to use the fax function, see Fax.
3. [Scanner]
Press to scan originals and save images as files.
For details about how to use the scanner function, see Scan.
4. [Printer]
Press to make settings for using the machine as a printer.
For details about how to make settings for the printer function, see Print.
5. Home screen image
You can display an image on the [Home] screen, such as a corporate logo. To change the image, see
"Displaying an Image on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)", Convenient
Functions.
62
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)
6.
/
Press to switch pages when the icons are not displayed on 1 page.
7. Shortcut icon
You can add shortcuts to programs or Web pages to the [Home] screen. For details about how to register
shortcuts, see page 63 "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)".
The program number appears on the bottom of the shortcut icon. For details about examples of shortcuts that
you can program, see page 76 "Example of Programs".
8. [Address Book Management]
Press to display the Address Book.
For details about how to use the Address Book, see "Address Book", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
9. [Browser]
Press to display Web pages.
For details about how to use the browser function, see "Using the Browser Function", Convenient Functions.
10. [Document Server]
Press to store or print documents on the machine's hard disk.
For details about how to use the Document Server function, see Copy/ Document Server.
Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation
Panel)
You can add shortcuts to programs stored in copier, facsimile, or scanner mode, or Web pages
registered in Favorites using the browser function.
You can also review icons of functions and embedded software applications that you deleted from the
[Home] screen.
• Shortcuts to programs stored in Document Server mode cannot be registered to the [Home] screen.
• Shortcut names of up to 32 characters can be displayed in a standard screen. If the name of the
shortcut is longer than 32 characters, the 32nd character is replaced with "...". Only 30 characters
can be displayed in a simple screen. If the name of the shortcut is longer than 30 characters, the
30th character is replaced with "...".
• For details about how to make a program, see page 73 "Registering Functions in a Program".
• For details about the procedure for registering Web pages to Favorites, see "Specifying the
Settings for Favorites", Convenient Functions.
• Shortcuts to Web pages that are registered to Common Favorites can be registered to the [Home]
screen. When user authentication is enabled, shortcuts to Web pages that are registered to
Favorites by User can also be registered to a user's [Home] screen.
63
2. Getting Started
• For details about the procedure for registering a shortcut using the [Program] screen, see
"Registering a Shortcut to a Program to the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.
• You can register up to 72 function and shortcut icons. Delete unused icons if the limit is reached. For
details see "Deleting an Icon on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)",
Convenient Functions.
• You can change the position of icons. For details, see "Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home]
Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)", Convenient Functions.
Adding icons to the [Home] screen using Web Image Monitor (when using the
standard operation panel)
1. Start Web Image Monitor.
For details, see "Using Web Image Monitor", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
2. Log in to Web Image Monitor.
3. To add icons to the default [Home] screen, point to [Device Management], and then click
[Device Home Management]. To add icons to a user's [Home] screen, point to [Customize
Screen per User].
4. Click [Edit Icons].
5. Point to [ Icon can be added.] of the position that you want to add, and then click [
Add].
6. Select the function or shortcut icon you want to add.
7. Click [OK] four times.
Adding icons to the [Home] screen using the User Tools (when using the standard
operation panel)
In the following procedure, a shortcut to a copier program is registered to the [Home] screen.
1. Register a program.
64
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)
2. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CXX005
3. Press [Edit Home].
4. Press [Add Icon].
65
2. Getting Started
5. Press the [Program] tab.
6. Make sure that [Copier Program] is selected.
7. Select the program you want to add.
8. Specify the position where [Blank] is displayed.
66
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)
9. Press [OK].
10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• Press
on the upper-right corner of the screen to check the position on the simple screen.
67
2. Getting Started
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using
the Smart Operation Panel)
To display the [Home] screen, press the [Home] key on the control panel.
One icon is assigned to each function, and these icons are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can
add shortcuts to frequently used functions or Web pages to the [Home] screen. Also, you can register
widgets such as the Change Languages Widget to it.
• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
The [Home] screen of the Smart Operation Panel consists of five screens, from Home screen 1 to Home
screen 5. Home screen 3 is the default screen that appears first after you press the [Home] key.
To switch between screens, flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.
1
2
3
5
4
6
DCG042
1. The name of the user who is logged in
Displays the name of the user currently logging in to the machine. The name of the user is displayed only when
user authentication is enabled.
2. [Login]/[Logout]
These keys are displayed when user authentication is enabled. When you press [Login], the authentication
screen appears. If you have been already logged in to the machine, [Logout] appears. To log out of the
machine, press [Logout].
For details about how to log in and out, see page 80 "Logging In the Machine".
3. Energy Saver
Press to switch to and from Sleep mode.
For details about the modes, see "Saving Energy", Getting Started.
68
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
4. Icon display area
Displays the function or application icons and widgets. Displayed icons differ between the five home screens.
For details about icons on each screen, see "Main Icons on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart
Operation Panel)", Getting Started.
You can also add shortcuts and arrange icons using folders. For details, see "Customizing the [Home]
Screen", Convenient Functions.
5. Application list icon
Press to display the application list. The list contains all the applications that are installed on the Smart
Operation Panel. You can create shortcuts to the applications on the [Home] screen. For details, see
"Customizing the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.
6. Icons to switch between screens
Press to switch between the five home screens. The icons appear at the bottom right and left of the screen, the
number of icons indicates the number of screens on each side of the current screen. For example, when you
view Home screen 3, 2 icons are displayed at both the right and left sides.
To view thumbnails of all five home screens, hold down
.
Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
Adding shortcuts to the [Home] screen (when using the Smart Operation Panel)
You can add shortcuts to the machine's functions.
You can display the icons for the machine's functions and the embedded software applications after you
delete them from the [Home] screen.
1. Press the [Home] key.
CZP155
2. Select the screen to which you want to add a shortcut.
3. Press and hold down an area on the screen where no icons are displayed.
4. Press [Icon] on the [Add to Home] screen.
69
2. Getting Started
5. Press [Application] or [Machine Application].
Press [Application] to select quick applications or other Smart Operation Panel applications.
Press [Machine Application] to select copier mode, fax mode, or some other of the machine's
applications.
6. Select the application you want to add from the list.
Adding shortcuts to bookmarks on the [Home] screen (when using the Smart
Operation Panel)
You can add shortcuts to bookmarks that have been registered in favorites in the Web Browser to the
[Home] screen.
1. Press the [Home] key.
CZP155
2. Select the screen to which you want to add a shortcut.
3. Press and hold down an area on the screen where no icons are displayed.
4. Press [Icon] on the [Add to Home] screen.
5. Press [Bookmark].
6. Select the bookmark you want to add from the list.
Adding shortcuts to programs to the [Home] screen (when using the Smart Operation
Panel)
You can add shortcuts to programs registered on Copier, Facsimile, or Scanner mode.
Even if you press [Program to Home] on the [Program] screen of each function, the shortcuts are not
displayed on the [Home] screen.
1. Display the function screen to which you want to register a program.
2. Press [Recall/Program/Change Program] on the bottom left of screen.
3. Register a program.
70
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
4. Press the [Home] key.
CZP155
5. Select the screen to which you want to add a shortcut.
6. Press and hold down an area on the screen where no icons are displayed.
7. Press [Icon] on the [Add to Home] screen.
8. Press [Machine Application].
9. Select the program you want to add from the list.
Adding shortcuts from the application list screen (when using the Smart Operation
Panel)
You can add shortcuts of applications installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Press the [Home] key.
CZP155
2. Select the screen to which you want to add a shortcut.
3. Press
.
4. Press and hold the icon you want to add to the [Home] screen.
71
2. Getting Started
Adding widgets to the [Home] screen (when using the Smart Operation Panel)
You can add widgets to the [Home] screen to show the remaining amount of toner or change the display
language.
1. Press the [Home] key.
CZP155
2. Select the screen to which you want to add a widget.
3. Press and hold down an area on the screen where no icons are displayed.
4. Press [Widget] on the [Add to Home] screen.
5. Select the widget you want to add from the list.
72
Registering Functions in a Program
Registering Functions in a Program
Depending on the functions, the number of programs that can be registered is different.
• Copier: 25 programs
• Document Server: 25 programs
• Facsimile: 100 programs
• Scanner: 25 programs
The following settings can be registered to programs:
Copier:
Original type, density, Special Original, paper tray, Store File (except for User Name, File Name,
and Password), Auto Reduce / Enlarge, Create Margin, ID Card Copy, Finishing, Cover/Slip
Sheet, Edit / Stamp, Dup./Combine/Series, Reduce / Enlarge, number of copies
Document Server (on the initial document print screen):
2 Sided Copy Top to Top, 2 Sided Copy Top to Bottom, Booklet, Magazine, Finishing, Cover/Slip
Sheet (except for Main Sheet Tray in Designate / Chapter), Edit / Stamp, number of prints
Facsimile:
Scan Settings, density, Original Feed Type, File Type, Store File (except for User Name, File
Name, and Password), Preview, transmission type, destinations (except for folder destinations),
Select Line, Adv.Features, memory transmission/immediate transmission, Communi. Result Rep., TX
Mode (except for Subject)
Scanner:
Scan Settings, density, Original Feed Type, Send File Type / Name (except for Security Settings
and Start No.), Store File (except for User Name, File Name, and Password), Preview,
Destinations selected from the Address Book, Text, Subject, Security, Recept. Notice
This section explains how to register functions in a program using copier function as an example.
1. Display the initial copy screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Copier] icon on the
[Home] screen.
73
2. Getting Started
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Copier] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Edit the copy settings so all functions you want to store in a program are selected.
3. Display the program screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Program] key.
CXV045
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [Recall/Program/Change Program] on the bottom left of the screen.
4. Press [Program].
74
Registering Functions in a Program
5. Press the program number you want to register.
6. Enter the program name.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
• The number of characters you can enter for a program name varies depending on the functions as
follows:
• Copier: 34 characters
• Document Server: 34 characters
• Facsimile: 20 characters
• Scanner: 34 characters
• When a specified program is registered as the default, its values become the default settings, which
are displayed without pressing the [Program] key, when modes are cleared or reset, and after the
machine is turned on. See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient
Functions.
• When the paper tray you specified in a program is empty and if there is more than one paper tray
with the same size paper in it, the paper tray prioritized under [Paper Tray Priority: Copier] or
[Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile] in the [Tray Paper Settings] tab will be selected first. For details, see
"System Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• Destinations can be registered to a program of the scanner mode only when [Include Destinations]
is selected for [Program Setting for Destinations] in [Scanner Features]. For details about the setting,
see "General Settings", Scan.
• Folder destinations that have protection codes cannot be registered to a program of the scanner
mode.
• Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the [Reset] key unless the
program is deleted or overwritten.
• Program numbers with
next to them already have settings made for them.
75
2. Getting Started
• Programs can be registered to the [Home] screen, and can be recalled easily. For details, see
"Registering a Shortcut to a Program to the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions and page 69
"Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)". Shortcuts to
programs stored in Document Server mode cannot be registered to the [Home] screen.
Example of Programs
Copier mode
Program name
76
Program description
Effect
Eco copy
Specify [Combine 2 Sides] in
[Dup./Combine/Series].
You can save paper and toner.
Dated confidential
copy
In [Edit / Stamp], specify
[CONFIDENTIAL] under [Preset
Stamp], and [Date Stamp].
You can increase security
awareness by printing
"CONFIDENTIAL" and the date on
copies.
Conference
material copy
Specify [Combine 2 Sides] in
[Dup./ Combine/ Series] and
[Staple] in [Finishing].
You can copy conference materials
efficiently.
Magazine copy
Specify [Magazine] in [Dup./
Combine/Series] and [Staple:
Center] in [Finishing].
You can save paper. Also, you can
perform printing jobs such as
producing leaflets in-house instead
of having them printed by an
outside printing company.
Unified-size copy
Specify [Mixed Sizes] in [Special
Original] and [Auto Reduce /
Enlarge] in the initial display
You can print various size copies
onto one size of paper, so they are
easier to manage.
Stamping
corporate name
copy
Specify [User Stamp] in [Edit /
Stamp].
You can stamp the name of your
company on copies of working or
architectural drawings. Your
company name needs to be preregistered in the machine.
Thumbnail copy
Specify [Combine 1 Side] in [Dup./
Combine/Series].
You can copy up to 8 pages onto
one side of a sheet, so that you can
save paper.
Registering Functions in a Program
Program name
Storage copy:
XXXX
Program description
Specify a folder in [Target Folder to
Store] in [Store File].
(replace XXXX by a
folder name)
Effect
You can use folders to organize
stored files by user name or
intended use.
Scanner mode
Program name
Program description
Effect
Easy PDF scan
Select [Full Color: Text / Photo] in
You can scan documents efficiently.
[Scan Settings]. In [Send File Type /
Name], select [PDF] under [File
Type] and enter the business details
such as "London branch: daily
report" under [File Name].
High compression
PDF scan
Select [Full Color: Text / Photo] in
[Scan Settings] and [High
Compression PDF] in [Send File
Type / Name].
You can compress the data size of
scanned documents, so that you can
send and store them.
Long-term storage
scan
Select [PDF/A] in [Send File Type /
Name].
You can easily digitize documents
to "PDF/A" file format, which is
suitable for long-term storage.
Unified-size scan
In [Scan Settings], select [Mixed
Original Sizes] in [Scan Size] and
specify the finished size of scanned
data in [Reduce / Enlarge] under
[Edit].
You can skip this procedure to unify
the size when reprinting scanned
data.
Digital signature
scan
In [Send File Type / Name], specify
[PDF] in [File Type], and also
specify [Digital Signature].
You can add a digital signature to
an important document such as a
contract, so that any data tampering
can be detected.
Dividing file scan
Specify [Divide] in [Original Feed
Type].
You can scan a multiple page
original as one file by splitting it into
groups of a specified number of
pages.
77
2. Getting Started
Program name
Program description
Effect
High resolution
scan
Specify settings to save scanned
data in TIFF format. Also, specify a
higher resolution in [Scan Settings].
Scanned documents maintain much
of the detail of the originals, but the
size of the data may be quite large.
Batch document
scan
Select [Batch] in [Original Feed
Type].
You can apply multiple scans to a
large volume of originals and send
the scanned originals as a single
job.
Scan to XXXX
Select e-mail or folder destinations
(replace XXXX by a from the list that is registered in the
destination name) machine's Address Book, and then
specify the scan settings.
If you register destinations and scan
settings that you use often, you can
skip the procedures to specify them
when sending a scanned file.
Storage scan:
XXXX
You can use folders to organize
stored files by user name or
intended use.
Specify a folder in [Target Folder to
Store] in [Store File].
(replace XXXX by a
folder name)
Facsimile mode
Program name
Program description
Effect
Transmission result
notification fax
Select [Preview] in the initial display
and specify [Email TX Results] in [TX
Mode].
You can check whether the
transmission settings are correct
before and after transmission.
Specified time fax
transmission
Specify [Send Later] in [TX Mode].
You can send a fax at a specified
time.
Departmental fax
transmission
Specify [Fax Header Print] in [TX
Mode].
This setting can be used if the
receiver specifies forwarding
destinations by senders.
• Depending on the options installed, some functions cannot be registered. For details, see "Functions
Requiring Optional Configurations", Getting Started.
• The names of programs given above are just examples. You can assign any name to a program
according to your objectives.
• Depending on your business details or the type of documents to be scanned, registering a program
cannot be recommended.
78
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On/Off the Power
The main power switch is on the right side of the machine. When this switch is turned on, the main power
turns on and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel lights up. When this switch is
turned off, the main power turns off and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel
goes out. When this is done, machine power is off. When the fax unit is installed, fax files in memory
may be lost if you turn this switch off. Use this switch only when necessary.
Turning On the Main Power
1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.
DCG012
Turning Off the Main Power
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.
1. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out. The main power turns off automatically when the machine shuts
down. If the screen on the control panel does not disappear, contact your service representative.
79
2. Getting Started
Logging In the Machine
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is active, the authentication
screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own Login User
Name and Login Password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot use the machine until you
enter the User Code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.
• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Name, Login Password, and User Code. For details
about user authentication, see Security Guide.
• User Code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the Address
Book as "User Code".
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel
If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a User Code appears.
1. Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].
Logging In Using the Control Panel (When Using the Standard Operation
Panel)
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
80
Logging In the Machine
1. Press [Login].
2. Enter a Login User Name, and then press [OK].
3. Enter a Login Password, and then press [OK].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Logging In Using the Control Panel (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
1. Press [Login] on the top right on the screen.
2. Press [User Name].
3. Enter a Login User Name, and then press [Done].
4. Press [Password].
5. Enter a Login Password, and then press [Done].
6. Press [Login].
81
2. Getting Started
Logging Out Using the Control Panel (When Using the Standard Operation
Panel)
This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.
1. Press the [Login/Logout] key.
CXV044
2. Press [Yes].
Logging Out Using the Control Panel (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.
1. Press [Logout] on the top right on the screen.
2. Press [OK].
82
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
(mainly Europe)
• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so may result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.
• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.
1. Lift the ADF.
Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the original might not be
detected correctly.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.
1
DCG030
1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF.
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
(mainly Asia)
• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so may result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.
83
2. Getting Started
• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.
1. Lift the ADF or the exposure glass cover.
Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the original might not be
detected correctly.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.
1
DCG030
1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF or the exposure glass cover.
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
(mainly North America)
• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so may result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.
• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.
1. Lift the ADF.
Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the original might not be
detected correctly.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.
84
Placing Originals
1
DCG030
1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF.
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder
Be sure not to block the sensor or load the original untidily. Doing so may cause the machine to detect
the size of the original incorrectly or display a paper misfeed message. Also, be sure not to place
originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
• When inserting originals in the ARDF, push them in once and without force.
• After turning on the power, do not place originals in the ARDF until the "Ready" message appears
on the copy screen.
ARDF
1
2
DCG007
85
2. Getting Started
One-pass duplex scanning ADF
1
2
DCG008
1. Sensors
2. Original guide
1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.
2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The first page should be on the top.
(The illustration shows the ARDF.)
1
DCG009
1. Limit mark
86
3. Copy
This chapter describes frequently used copier functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Copy/ Document Server available on our website.
Basic Procedure
To make copies of originals, place them on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
When placing the original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be copied. When placing
the original in the ADF, place them so that the first page is on the top.
(mainly Europe)
For details about placing the original on the exposure glass, see page 83 "Placing Originals on the
Exposure Glass
(mainly Europe)".
(mainly Asia)
For details about placing the original on the exposure glass, see page 83 "Placing Originals on the
Exposure Glass
(mainly Asia)".
(mainly North America)
For details about placing the original on the exposure glass, see page 84 "Placing Originals on the
Exposure Glass
(mainly North America)".
For details about placing the original in the ADF, see page 85 "Placing Originals in the Auto Document
Feeder".
To copy onto paper other than plain paper, specify the paper type in User Tools according to the weight
of the paper you are using. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
1. Display the initial copy screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Copier] icon on the
[Home] screen.
CXX002
87
3. Copy
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Copier] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
When there are previous settings remaining, press the [Reset] key.
3. Place the originals.
4. Make desired settings.
5. Enter the number of copies with the number keys.
The maximum copy quantity that can be entered is 999.
6. Press the [Start] key.
When placing the original on the exposure glass, press the [ ] key after all originals are scanned.
Some functions such as Batch mode may require that you press the [ ] key when placing originals
in the ADF. Follow the messages that appear on screen.
7. When the copy job is finished, press the [Reset] key to clear the settings.
88
Auto Reduce / Enlarge
Auto Reduce / Enlarge
The machine automatically detects the original size and then selects an appropriate reproduction ratio
based on the paper size you select.
CKN008
• If you select a reproduction ratio after pressing [Auto Reduce / Enlarge], [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]
is canceled and the image cannot be rotated automatically.
This is useful to copy different size originals to the same size paper.
If the orientation in which your original is placed is different from that of the paper you are copying onto,
the machine rotates the original image by 90 degrees and fits it on the copy paper (Rotate Copy).
For example, to reduce A3 (11 × 17) originals to fit onto A4 (81/2 × 11) paper, select a paper tray
containing A4 (81/2 × 11) paper, and then press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]. The image is
automatically rotated. For details about Rotate Copy, see "Rotate Copy", Copy/ Document Server.
The original sizes and orientations you can use with this function are as follows:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Original location
Original size and orientation
, A5 , 81/2 × 13
Exposure glass
A3 , B4 JIS , A4
, B5 JIS
ADF
A3 , B4 JIS , A4
× 17 , 81/2 × 11
, B5 JIS
, A5
, 81/2 × 13
, B6 JIS
, 11
(mainly North America)
Original location
Original size and orientation
Exposure glass
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
, 51/2 × 81/2
ADF
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
, 51/2 × 81/2
1
1
, 10 × 14 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , A3 , A4
89
3. Copy
1. Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
2. Select the paper size.
3. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
90
Duplex Copying
Duplex Copying
Copies two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto a 2-sided page. During copying, the image is
shifted to allow for the binding margin.
CKN009
There are two types of Duplex.
1 Sided
2 Sided
Copies two 1-sided pages on one 2-sided page.
2 Sided
2 Sided
Copies one 2-sided page on one 2-sided page.
The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you place your originals ( or
).
Original orientation and completed copies
To copy on both sides of the paper, select the original and copy orientation according to how you
want the printout to appear.
Original
Placing originals
Original
Orientation
Orientation
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
91
3. Copy
Original
Placing originals
Original
Orientation
Orientation
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
1. Press [Dup./Combine/Series].
2. Make sure that [Duplex] is selected.
3. Select [1 Sided 2 Sided] or [2 Sided
document to be output.
2 Sided] according to how you want the
To change the original or copy orientation, press [Orientation].
4. Press [OK].
5. Place the originals.
6. Press [Special Original].
92
Duplex Copying
7. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
8. Press the [Start] key.
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation
Select the orientation of the originals and copies if the original is two-sided or if you want to copy onto
both sides of the paper.
• Top to Top
CKN011
• Top to Bottom
CKN012
1. Press [Orientation].
93
3. Copy
2. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Original:] if the original is two-sided.
3. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Copy:].
4. Press [OK].
94
Combined Copying
Combined Copying
This mode can be used to select a reproduction ratio automatically and copy the originals onto a single
sheet of copy paper.
The machine selects a reproduction ratio between 25 and 400%. If the orientation of the original is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 degrees to
make copies properly.
Orientation of the original and image position of Combine
The image position of Combine differs according to original orientation and the number of originals
to be combined.
• Portrait ( ) originals
CKN015
• Landscape ( ) originals
CKN016
Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF)
The default value for the copy order in the Combine function is [From Left to Right]. To copy
originals from right to left in the ADF, place them upside down.
• Originals read from left to right
95
3. Copy
CKN010
• Originals read from right to left
CKN017
One-Sided Combine
Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.
CKN014
There are six types of One-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 2 Originals
Combine 1 Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 4 Originals
Combine 1 Side
Copies four 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 8 Originals
Combine 1 Side
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 2 Pages
Combine 1 Side
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.
96
Combined Copying
2 Sided 4 Pages
Combine 1 Side
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 8 Pages
Combine 1 Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1. Press [Dup./Combine/Series].
2. Press [Combine].
3. Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for [Original:].
If you selected [2 Sided], you can change the orientation.
4. Press [Combine 1 Side].
5. Select the number of originals to combine.
6. Press [OK].
7. Select the paper size.
8. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
Two-Sided Combine
Combines various pages of originals onto two sides of one sheet.
97
3. Copy
CKN074
There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 4 Originals
Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 1-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
1 Sided 8 Originals
Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
1 Sided 16 Originals
Combine 2 Sides
Copies 16 1-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
2 Sided 4 Pages
Combine 2 Sides
Copies two 2-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
2 Sided 8 Pages
Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
2 Sided 16 Pages
Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 2-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
1. Press [Dup./Combine/Series].
2. Press [Combine].
98
Combined Copying
3. Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for [Original:].
4. Press [Combine 2 Sides].
5. Press [Orientation].
6. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Original:] if the original is two-sided.
7. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Copy:], and then press [OK].
8. Select the number of originals to combine.
9. Press [OK].
10. Select the paper size.
11. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
99
3. Copy
Copying onto Custom Size Paper from the
Bypass Tray
Paper that has a horizontal length of 148.0–600.0 mm (5.83–23.62 inches) and a vertical length of
90.0–304.8 mm (3.55–12.00 inches) can be fed in from the bypass tray. Note however that the
limitation on the horizontal and vertical length range will vary depending on which options are installed.
• When prints are delivered to the shift tray of Finisher SR3140 or Booklet Finisher SR3150:
Horizontal length: 148.0–431.8 mm (5.83–17.00 inches), vertical length: 90.0–304.8 mm
(3.55–12.00 inches)
• When prints are delivered to Internal tray 2:
Horizontal length: 148.0–457.2 mm (5.83–18.00 inches), vertical length: 90.0–304.8 mm
(3.55–12.00 inches)
• When prints are delivered to other trays:
Horizontal length: 148.0–600.0 mm (5.83–23.62 inches), vertical length: 90.0–304.8 mm
(3.55–12.00 inches)
1. Load the paper face down in the bypass tray.
The bypass tray (
) is automatically selected.
2. Press the [ ] key.
3. Press [Paper Size].
4. Press [Custom Size].
5. Enter the horizontal size with the number keys, and then press [ ].
6. Enter the vertical size with the number keys, and then press [ ].
7. Press [OK] twice.
8. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
100
Copying onto Envelopes
Copying onto Envelopes
This section describes how to copy onto regular size and custom size envelopes. Place the original on
the exposure glass and place the envelope in the bypass tray or paper tray.
Specify the thickness of the paper according to the weight of the envelopes you are printing on. For
details about the relationship between paper weight and paper thickness and the sizes of envelopes that
can be used, see page 172 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
About handling envelopes, supported envelope types, and how to load envelopes, see page 179
"Envelopes".
• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes. If the Duplex function is specified, press [1
sided 2 sided:TtoT] to cancel the setting.
To copy onto custom size envelopes, you must specify the envelope's dimensions. Specify the horizontal
and vertical length of the envelope.
CJF005
: Horizontal
: Vertical
Be sure to include the fully open flap in the horizontal dimension.
Copying onto Envelopes from the Bypass Tray
Before using this function, select [Envelope] for the paper type under [Tray Paper Settings] in User Tools.
For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
101
3. Copy
1. Load the envelopes face down in the bypass tray.
The bypass tray (
) is automatically selected.
2. Press the [ ] key.
3. Press [Paper Size].
4. Specify the envelope size, and then press [OK] twice.
5. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
Copying onto Envelopes from the Paper Tray
Before using this function, specify the paper size and type under [Tray Paper Settings] in User Tools. For
the paper type, select [Envelope]. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/
System Settings.
1. Select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
2. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
102
Sort
Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.
• You cannot use the bypass tray with Rotate Sort.
Sort/Shift Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in sequential order.
To use Shift Sort, a finisher or the internal shift tray is required. Each time the copies of one set or a
job are delivered, the next copy is shifted to separate each set or job.
CKN018
Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by 90 degrees (
) and delivered to the copy tray.
CKN019
To use the Rotate Sort function, two paper trays loaded with paper of the same size and type, but in
different orientation (
), are required. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
103
3. Copy
1. Press [Finishing].
2. Select [Sort] or [Rotate Sort], and then press [OK].
3. Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.
4. Place the originals.
To confirm the type of finishing, press the [Sample Copy] key.
5. Press the [Start] key.
Changing the Number of Sets
You can change the number of copy sets during copying.
• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected.
1. While "Copying..." is displayed, press the [Stop] key.
104
Sort
2. Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.
3. Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.
105
3. Copy
Storing Data in the Document Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature on the hard disk
of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
You can check the stored documents on the Document Server screen. For details about the Document
Server, see page 153 "Storing Data".
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Depending on your model, this function might not be available. For details, see "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations", Getting Started.
1. Press [Store File].
2. Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.
3. Specify a folder in which to store the document if necessary.
4. Press [OK].
5. Place the originals.
6. Make the scanning settings for the original.
7. Press the [Start] key.
Stores scanned originals in memory and makes one set of copies. If you want to store another
document, do so after copying is complete.
106
4. Fax
This chapter describes frequently used facsimile functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Fax available on our website.
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory
Transmission)
This section describes the basic procedure for transmitting documents using Memory Transmission.
You can specify the fax, IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail, or folder destinations. Multiple types of destination
can be specified simultaneously.
• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files. See
"When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-Mail", Troubleshooting.
1. Display the initial facsimile screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Facsimile] icon on the
[Home] screen.
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Fax] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Make sure "Ready" appears on the screen.
107
4. Fax
3. Make sure [Immed. TX] is not highlighted.
4. Place the original into the ADF.
5. Make the scan settings such as scan size and resolution.
6. Configure the transmission settings such as [TX Mode] as necessary.
7. Specify a destination.
You can enter the destination's number or address directly or select from the Address Book by
pressing the destination key.
If you make a mistake, press the [Clear] key, and then enter again.
8. When sending the same original to several destinations (broadcasting), specify the next
destination.
108
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)
9. If you send documents to Internet Fax or e-mail destinations or enable the Email TX
Results function, specify a sender.
10. Press the [Start] key.
Sending Originals Using the Exposure Glass (Memory Transmission)
1. Make sure [Immed. TX] is not highlighted.
2. Place the first page of the original face down on the exposure glass.
3. Specify a destination.
4. Make the scan settings you require.
5. Press the [Start] key.
6. Place the next original on the exposure glass within 60 seconds when you send multiple
originals, and then repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Repeat this step for each page.
7. Press the [ ] key.
The machine dials the destination and starts transmission.
109
4. Fax
Registering a Fax Destination
1. Display the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Address Book
Management] icon on the [Home] screen.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Address Book Management] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
3. Press [New Program].
4. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
5. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
6. Press [ Next].
7. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".
The keys you can select are as follows:
• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
8. Press [Fax Dest.].
9. Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
110
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)
10. Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
11. Specify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", and "International TX Mode".
12. Press [OK].
13. Close the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
Deleting a Fax Destination
• If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its registered
Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the settings in the fax function
before deleting any destinations.
1. Display the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Address Book
Management] icon on the [Home] screen.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Address Book Management] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
3. Select the name whose fax destination you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IPFax destination.
111
4. Fax
4. Press [Fax Dest.].
5. Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
6. Press [Delete All], and then press [OK] under "Fax Destination".
7. Press [OK].
8. Close the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
112
) on the top right of the screen.
Transmitting while Checking Connection to Destination (Immediate Transmission)
Transmitting while Checking Connection to
Destination (Immediate Transmission)
Using Immediate Transmission, you can send documents while checking the connection to the
destination.
You can specify fax or IP-Fax destinations.
If you specify Internet Fax, e-mail, folder destinations, and group or multiple destinations, the
transmission mode is automatically switched to Memory Transmission.
• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
1. Display the initial facsimile screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Facsimile] icon on the
[Home] screen.
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Fax] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Make sure "Ready" appears on the screen.
113
4. Fax
3. Press [Immed. TX].
4. Place the original into the ADF.
5. Select the scan settings you require.
6. Specify a destination.
If you make a mistake, press the [Clear] key, and then enter again.
7. Press the [Start] key.
Sending Originals Using the Exposure Glass (Immediate Transmission)
1. Press [Immed. TX].
2. Place the first page face down on the exposure glass.
3. Specify a destination.
4. Make the scan settings you require.
5. Press the [Start] key.
6. Place the next original on the exposure glass within 10 seconds when you send multiple
originals, and then repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Repeat this step for each page.
114
Transmitting while Checking Connection to Destination (Immediate Transmission)
7. Press the [ ] key.
115
4. Fax
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the [Start] key.
1. Cancel sending.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Reset] key.
CXZ001
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [Reset] on the top right of the screen.
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel scanning or transmitting of the original while it is being scanned.
If you cancel a transmission using the standard memory transmission function, you need to follow a
different procedure to cancel the transmission. See page 117 "Canceling a Transmission After the
Original Is Scanned".
116
Canceling a Transmission
1. Press the [Stop] key.
CXX006
2. Press [Cancel Scanning] or [Cancel TX].
Depending on the transmission mode and function you use, either [Cancel Scanning] or [Cancel
TX] is displayed.
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.
You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in memory, or if it fails to transmit.
All the scanned data is deleted from memory.
1. Press the [Stop] key.
CXX006
You can also press [TX/RX Status / Print], and then [Check / Stop Transmission File].
2. If a confirmation message appears, press [Standby File List].
3. Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [ ] or [ ] to find it. To cancel transmission of a file stored in the
memory, press the [File List] tab.
4. Press [Stop Transmission].
117
4. Fax
5. Press [OK].
To cancel another file, repeat Steps 3 through 5.
6. Press [Exit].
After pressing [Check / Stop Transmission File] under [TX/RX Status / Print] in Step 1, press [Exit]
twice.
118
Storing a Document
Storing a Document
You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a document.
The following information can be set for the stored documents as necessary:
User Name
You can set this function if necessary to know who and what departments stored documents in the
machine. A user name can be selected from the Address Book or entered manually.
File Name
You can specify a name for a stored document. If you do not specify a name, scanned documents
will be automatically assigned names such as "FAX0001" or "FAX0002".
Password
You can set this function so as not to send to unspecified people. A four to eight digit number can
be specified as a password.
You can also change the file information after storing files.
1. Place the original, and then specify the scan settings you require.
Specify the [Original Orientation] setting correctly. If you do not, the top/bottom orientation of the
original will not be displayed correctly in the preview.
2. Press [Store File].
3. Select [Send & Store] or [Store Only].
Select [Send & Store] to send documents after they are stored.
Select [Store Only] to store documents.
119
4. Fax
4. Set the user name, file name, and password as necessary.
• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the
password for confirmation, and then press [OK].
5. Press [OK].
6. If you have selected [Send & Store], specify the receiver.
7. Press the [Start] key.
Sending Stored Documents
The machine sends documents stored with the facsimile function in the Document Server.
The documents stored in the Document Server can be sent again and again until they are deleted.
The stored documents are sent with the scan settings made when they were stored.
You cannot use the following transmission methods:
• Immediate Transmission
• Parallel Memory Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
120
Storing a Document
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Select the documents to be sent.
When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
• Press [User Name] to place the documents in order by programmed user name.
• Press [File Name] to place the documents in alphabetical order.
• Press [Date] to place the documents in order of programmed date.
• Press [Queue] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
To view details about stored documents, press [Details].
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
3. If you select a document with a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
4. When you want to add your originals to stored documents and send them all at once,
press [Original Stored File] or [Stored file Original].
When [Original Stored File] is pressed, the machine sends the originals, and then stored files.
When [Stored file Original] is pressed, the machine sends the stored files, and then originals.
5. Press [OK].
6. To add an original to stored documents, place the original, and then select any scan
settings you require.
7. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
121
4. Fax
Printing the Journal Manually
To print the Journal manually, select the printing method: [All], [Print per File No.], or [Print per User].
All
Prints the results of communications in the order made.
Print per File No.
Prints only the results of communications specified by file number.
Print per User
Prints the results of communications by individual senders.
1. Press [TX/RX Status / Print].
2. Press [Print Journal].
3. Select the printing method.
4. If you selected [Print per File No.] in Step 3, enter a 4-digit file number using the number
keys.
5. If you selected [Print per User] in Step 3, select a user from the list, and then press [OK].
6. Press the [Start] key.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
122
5. Print
This chapter describes frequently used printer functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Print available on our website.
Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
Using Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the Standard
TCP/IP port will be set.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
1. Click [Quick Install] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
7. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.
123
5. Print
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties
This section explains how to open the printer driver properties from [Devices and Printers].
• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer settings. Log on as an Administrators
group member.
• You cannot change the machine default settings for individual users. Settings made in the printer
properties dialog box are applied to all users.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printer properties].
124
Standard Printing
Standard Printing
• The default setting is two-sided printing. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off] for the
two-sided printing setting.
• If you send a print job via USB 2.0 while the machine is in Low Power mode or Sleep mode, an
error message might appear when the print job is complete. In this case, check if the document was
printed.
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver
1. Click the WordPad menu button in the upper left corner of the window, and then click
[Print].
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Select the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
5. In the "Job Type:" list, select [Normal Print].
6. In the "Document Size:" list, select the size of the original to be printed.
7. In the "Orientation" area, select [Portrait] or [Landscape] as the orientation of the
original.
8. In the "Paper Type:" list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
9. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray that contains the paper you want to print
onto.
If you select [Auto Tray Select] in the "Input Tray:" list, the source tray is automatically selected
according to the paper size and type specified.
10. If you want to print multiple copies, specify a number of sets in the "Copies:" box.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
125
5. Print
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets
This section explains how to print on both sides of each page using the printer driver.
• The types of paper that can be printed on both sides are as follows:
• Plain (60 to 81 g/m2), Recycled, Special 1, Special 2, Special 3, Middle Thick (82 to 105
g/m2), Thick 1(106 to 169 g/m2), Thick 2(170 to 220 g/m2), Thick 3(221 to 256 g/m2),
Thin (52 to 59 g/m2), Color, Letterhead, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver
1. Click the WordPad menu button in the upper left corner of the window, and then click
[Print].
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
5. In the "Menu:" box, click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet].
6. Select the method for binding the output pages in the "2 sided:" list.
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
Types of Two-sided Printing
You can select which way the bound pages open by specifying which edge to bind.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
126
Open to Left
Open to Top
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page
This section explains how to print multiple pages onto a single sheet. The combine printing function
allows you to economize on paper by printing multiple sheets at reduced size onto a single sheet.
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver
1. Click the WordPad menu button in the upper left corner of the window, and then click
[Print].
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
5. In the "Menu:" box, click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet].
6. Select the combination pattern in the "Layout:" list, and then specify the method for
combining pages in the "Page Order:" list.
To draw a border line around each page, select [Draw Frame Border].
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
Types of Combine Printing
This function allows you to print 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages at reduced size onto a single sheet and to
specify a page ordering pattern for the combination. When combining 4 or more pages onto a single
sheet of paper, four patterns are available.
The following illustrations show example page ordering patterns for 2- and 4-page combinations.
2 Pages per Sheet
Orientation
From Left to Right/Top to
Bottom
From Right to Left/Top to
Bottom
Portrait
Landscape
127
5. Print
4 Pages per Sheet
Right, then Down
128
Down, then Right
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
Printing on Envelopes
Printing on Envelopes
Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel.
Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel
1. Load envelopes in the paper tray.
2. Display the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CXX005
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on the Home screen 4.
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Select the paper size setting of the paper tray in which the envelopes are loaded.
5. Select the envelope size, and then press [OK].
6. Press [ Next].
7. Select the paper type setting of the paper tray in which the envelopes are loaded.
8. Press [Envelope] in the "Paper Type" area, and then select the appropriate item in the
"Paper Thickness" area.
9. Press [OK].
10. Close the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
129
5. Print
Printing on Envelopes Using the Printer Driver
When using the PCL 6 printer driver
1. Click the WordPad menu button in the upper left corner of the window, and then click
[Print].
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. In the "Document Size:" list, select the envelope size.
5. In the "Paper Type:" list, select [Envelope].
6. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
130
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
Saving and Printing Using the Document
Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard disk, and allows you to edit
and print them as necessary.
• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.
• Do not cancel the file transfer process while the data is being sent to the Document Server. The
process may not be canceled properly. If you accidentally cancel a print job, use the control panel
of the machine to delete the transferred data. For details about how to delete documents that are
stored in the Document Server, see "Deleting Stored Documents", Copy/ Document Server, or
Web Image Monitor Help.
• Up to 3,000 files can be stored in the Document Server. New files cannot be stored when 3,000
files have already been stored. Even if less than 3,000 files are stored, new files cannot be stored
when
• The number of pages in a document exceeds 2,000.
• The total number of stored pages in the machine and the sent data has reached 9,000 (It may
be fewer depending on the print data).
• The hard disk is full.
You can send data created on a client computer to the Document Server.
Storing Documents in Document Server
• If the machine is not used as the Document Server, the maximum number of the documents that can
be stored in the server may be less than the number described in the specification.
1. Click the WordPad menu button in the upper left corner of the window, and then click
[Print].
2. In the "Select Printer" list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. In the "Job Type:" list, click [Document Server].
5. Click [Details...].
6. Enter a user ID, file name, password, and user name as required.
7. Specify the folder number to store the document in the "Folder Number" box.
When "0" is specified in the "Folder Number:" box, documents will be saved in the Shared folder.
131
5. Print
8. If the folder is protected by a password, enter the password in the "Folder Password:"
box.
9. Click [OK].
10. Change any other print settings if necessary.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
• You can print the documents stored in the Document Server using the control panel. For details, see
page 155 "Printing Stored Documents".
Managing Documents Stored in Document Server
If this machine is configured as a network printer using TCP/IP, you can view or delete the documents
stored in the machine's Document Server using Web Image Monitor from a client computer connected to
the network. You can print and operate this machine remotely without operating the control panel.
132
6. Scan
This chapter describes frequently used scanner functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Scan available on our website.
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
• Before performing this procedure, see "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder", Scan and
confirm the details of the destination computer. See also "Registering Folders", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings, and register the address of the destination computer to the address
book.
1. Display the initial scanner screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Scanner] icon on the
[Home] screen.
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Scanner] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the [Reset] key.
133
6. Scan
3. Press the [Folder] tab.
4. Place originals.
5. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.
Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
• Press [Scan Settings], and then press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab.
• Press [Original Feed Type], and then press [2 Sided Original].
• Press [PDF] under [Send File Type / Name].
6. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
7. Press the [Start] key.
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Windows/Confirming a
Computer's Information
The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running Windows, and
how to confirm the computer's information. In these examples, Windows 7 Ultimate is the operating
system, and the computer is a member in a network domain. Write down the confirmed information.
134
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
Step 1: Confirming the user name and computer name
Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], then [Accessories], and then click on
[Command Prompt].
2. Enter the command "ipconfig/all", and then press the [Enter] key.
3. Confirm the name of the computer.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].
You can also confirm the IPv4 address. The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4
address of the computer.
4. Next, enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key. (Be sure to put a
space between "set" and "user".)
5. Confirm the user name.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].
Step 2: Creating a shared folder on a computer running Microsoft Windows
Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 7 Ultimate and participating in a domain is used as an
example.
• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.
• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.
1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
When using Windows XP, right-click the folder, and then click [Sharing and Security].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, select [Advanced Sharing...].
When using Windows XP, on the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this folder].
Proceed to Step 5.
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
135
6. Scan
8. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK].
Step 3: Specifying access privileges for the created shared folder
If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:
1. Right-click the folder created in Step 2, and then click [Properties].
2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
4. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK].
Registering an SMB Folder
1. Display the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Address Book
Management] icon on the [Home] screen.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Address Book Management] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
136
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
3. Press [New Program].
4. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
5. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
6. Press [ Next].
7. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".
The keys you can select are as follows:
• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
8. Press [Auth. Info], and then press [ Next].
9. Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of "Folder Authentication".
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password that you have
specified in "Default User Name / Password (Send)" of File Transfer settings are applied.
10. Press [Change] under "Login User Name".
11. Enter the login user name of the destination computer, and then press [OK].
12. Press [Change] under "Login Password".
137
6. Scan
13. Enter the password of the destination computer, and then press [OK].
14. Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
15. Press [Folder].
16. Check that [SMB] is selected.
17. Press [Change] or [Browse Network], and then specify the folder.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder by browsing the
network.
18. Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
19. Press [Exit].
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
20. Press [OK].
21. Close the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
Locating the SMB folder manually
1. Press [Change] under "Path".
2. Enter the path where the folder is located.
For example: if the name of the destination computer is "User", and the folder name is "Share", the
path will be \\User\Share.
138
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
If the network does not allow automatic obtaining of IP addresses, include the destination
computer's IP address in the path. For example: if the IP address of the destination computer is
"192.168.0.191", and the folder name is "Share", the path will be \\192.168.0.191\Share.
3. Press [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit], and then enter the
path again.
Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network
1. Press [Browse Network].
The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
2. Select the group that contains the destination computer.
3. Select the computer name of the destination computer.
Shared folders under it appear.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
4. Select the folder you want to register.
5. Press [OK].
139
6. Scan
Deleting an SMB Registered Folder
1. Display the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Address Book
Management] icon on the [Home] screen.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Address Book Management] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
3. Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IPFax destination.
4. Press [Folder].
5. Press the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
6. Press [Yes].
7. Press [OK].
8. Close the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
140
) on the top right of the screen.
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
Entering the Path to the Destination Manually
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
4. Enter the path for the folder.
In the following example path, the shared folder name is "user" and the computer name is
"desk01":
\\desk01\user
5. Press [OK].
6. Depending on the destination setting, enter the user name for logging in to the computer.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
7. Depending on the destination setting, enter the password for logging in to the computer.
Press [Manual Entry] for the password to display the soft keyboard.
8. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified shared folder exists.
9. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
10. Press [OK].
141
6. Scan
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by Email
1. Display the initial scanner screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Scanner] icon on the
[Home] screen.
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Scanner] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the [Reset] key.
3. Press the [Email] tab.
4. Place originals.
142
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
5. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.
Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
• Press [Scan Settings], and then press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab.
• Press [Original Feed Type], and then press [2 Sided Original].
• Press [PDF] under [Send File Type / Name].
6. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
7. To specify the e-mail sender, press [Sender Name], and then press [OK].
8. To use Message Disposition Notification, press [Recept. Notice].
If you select [Recept. Notice], the selected e-mail sender will receive e-mail notification when the email recipient has opened the e-mail.
9. Press the [Start] key.
Registering an E-mail Destination
1. Display the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Address Book
Management] icon on the [Home] screen.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Address Book Management] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
3. Press [New Program].
4. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
5. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
143
6. Scan
6. Press [ Next].
7. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".
The keys you can select are as follows:
• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
8. Press [Email].
9. Press [Change] under "Email Address".
10. Enter the e-mail address.
11. Press [OK].
144
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
12. Select [Email / Internet Fax Destination] or [Internet Fax Destination Only].
If [Email / Internet Fax Destination] is specified, registered e-mail addresses appear in both Internet
fax address display and e-mail address display on the fax function screen, and in the address
display on the scanner function screen.
If [Internet Fax Destination Only] is specified, registered e-mail addresses only appear in Internet
fax display on the fax function screen.
13. If you want to use Internet fax, specify whether or not to use "Send via SMTP Server".
14. Press [OK].
15. Close the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
Deleting an E-mail Destination
1. Display the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Address Book
Management] icon on the [Home] screen.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Address Book Management] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
3. Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys. You can search by the
registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination.
4. Press [Email].
5. Press [Change] under "Email Address".
6. Press [Delete All], and then press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
8. Close the Address Book screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
145
6. Scan
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
Entering an E-mail Address Manually
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Enter the e-mail address.
3. Press [OK].
146
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files
• You can specify a password for each stored file. We recommend that you protect stored files from
unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
• Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We advise against using
the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage that may
result from the loss of files.
1. Display the initial scanner screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Scanner] icon on the
[Home] screen.
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Scanner] icon on the Home screen 4.
2. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the [Reset] key.
3. Place originals.
147
6. Scan
4. Press [Store File].
5. Press [Store to HDD].
6. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name],
[Password], and [Select Folder].
• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the password for
confirmation, and then press [OK].
• Select Folder
Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
7. Press [OK].
8. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
9. Press the [Start] key.
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List
This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.
148
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
4. Press [Preview].
149
6. Scan
Specifying the File Type
This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type of a file you want to send.
File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, sending stored files by e-mail
or Scan to Folder, and saving files on a memory storage device.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page: [TIFF / JPEG], [PDF]
If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created for each
single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages scanned.
• Multi-page: [TIFF], [PDF]
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are combined and
sent as a single file.
Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details about
file types, see "Notes about and limitations of file types", Scan.
1. Press [Send File Type / Name].
2. Select a file type.
If the File Type is set to [PDF], configure PDF File Setting as required.
3. Press [OK].
150
Specifying Scan Settings
Specifying Scan Settings
1. Press [Scan Settings].
2. Specify resolution, scan size, and other settings, as required.
3. Press [OK].
151
6. Scan
152
7. Document Server
This chapter describes frequently used Document Server functions and operations. For information not
included in this chapter, see Copy/ Document Server available on our website.
Storing Data
This section describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document Server.
• A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are
complete, and it can be accessed by other users. After the operation, be sure to press the [Reset]
key to cancel the document selection.
• The user name registered to a stored document in the Document Server is to identify the document
creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
• When turning on the fax transmission or scanning by the scanner, make sure that all other
operations are ended.
File Name
A file name such as "COPY0001" and "COPY0002" is automatically attached to the scanned
document. You can change the file name.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign
it, select the user name registered in the Address Book, or enter the name directly. Depending on
the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name].
For details about the Address Book, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can specify a password for any stored document. A
protected document can only be accessed if its password is entered. If a password is specified for
the documents, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file name.
153
7. Document Server
1. Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Document Server]
icon on the screen.
CXX002
2. Press [To Scanning Screen].
3. Press [Target Fldr. to Store].
4. Specify a folder in which to store the document, and then press [OK].
5. Press [User Name].
6. Specify a user name, and then press [OK].
The user names shown are names that were registered in the Address Book. To specify a name not
shown in the screen, press [Manual Entry], and then enter a user name.
7. Press [File Name].
8. Enter a file name, and then press [OK].
9. Press [Password].
10. Enter a password with the number keys, and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for the password.
11. For double-check, enter the password again, and then press [OK].
12. Place the original.
13. Specify the original scanning conditions.
14. Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
After scanning, a list of folders will be displayed. If the list does not appear, press [Finish Scanning].
154
Printing Stored Documents
Printing Stored Documents
Prints stored documents on the Document Server.
The items you can specify on the printing screen are as follows:
• Paper tray
• The number of prints
• [Finishing] ([Sort], [Rotate Sort], [Stack], [Staple], [Punch], [Half Fold: Print Outside])
• [Cover/Slip Sheet] ([Front Cover], [Front/Back Cover], [Designate/Chapter], [Slip Sheet])
• [Edit / Stamp] ([Margin Adj.], [Stamp])
• [2 Sided Copy Top to Top], [2 Sided Copy Top to Bottom], [Booklet], [Magazine]
For details about each function, see Copy/ Document Server.
1. Select a folder.
2. Select a document to be printed.
3. When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat Step 2.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.
4. When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen], and then configure print
settings.
5. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
The maximum quantity that can be entered is 999.
6. Press the [Start] key.
155
7. Document Server
156
8. Web Image Monitor
This chapter describes frequently used Web Image Monitor functions and operations. For information
not included in this chapter, see Connecting the Machine/ System Settings available on our website or
Web Image Monitor Help.
Displaying Top Page
This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.
• When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros. For example: If the address is
"192.168.001.010", you must enter it as "192.168.1.10".
1. Start your web browser.
2. Enter "http://(machine's IP address or host name)/" in your web browser's URL bar.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server
authentication is issued, enter "https://(machine's IP address or host name)/".
Web Image Monitor is divided into the following areas:
2
3
1
4
5
DDE001
1. Menu area
If you select a menu item, its content will be shown.
2. Header area
Display icons for the links to Help and the keyword search function. This area also displays [Login] and
[Logout], which allow you to switch between the administrator and guest mode.
157
8. Web Image Monitor
3. Refresh/Help
(Refresh): Click
at the upper right in the work area to update the machine information. Click the web
browser's [Refresh] button to refresh the entire browser screen.
(Help): Use Help to view or download Help file contents.
4. Basic Information area
Display the basic information of the machine.
5. Work area
Display the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
158
9. Adding Paper and Toner
This chapter describes how to load paper into the paper tray and recommended paper sizes and types.
Loading Paper
Precautions for Loading Paper
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.
• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the
entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 172 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
• You might at times hear a rustling noise from paper moving through the machine. This noise does
not indicate a malfunction.
Loading Paper into Paper Trays
Every paper tray is loaded in the same way.
In the following example procedure, paper is loaded into Tray 2.
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, thin paper may
wrinkle, or the paper may misfeed.
159
9. Adding Paper and Toner
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DCG015
2. Square the paper and load it print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DCG016
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the paper trays by adjusting the positions of side fences
and end fence. For details, see "Changing the Paper Size in Paper Trays", Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.
• You can load envelopes in the paper trays. When loading envelopes, place them in the correct
orientation. For details, see page 179 "Envelopes".
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray
Use the bypass tray to use OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper, and paper that
cannot be loaded in the paper trays.
160
Loading Paper
• The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type. Do not
stack paper over the limit mark. For the maximum number of sheets you can load, see page 172
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
1. Open the bypass tray.
DCG017
2. Load the paper face down until you hear the beep.
3. Align the paper guides to the paper size.
If the guides are not flush against the paper, images might be skewed or paper misfeeds might
occur.
DCG018
• When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to load the paper in
orientation.
• Certain types of paper might not be detected properly when placed on the bypass tray. If this
happens, remove the paper and place it on the bypass tray again.
• Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11
or larger size paper in the bypass tray.
• When loading thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies, specify the paper size and the
paper type.
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 169 "Loading
Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper".
161
9. Adding Paper and Toner
• You can load envelopes into the bypass tray. Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation.
For details, see page 179 "Envelopes".
• Specify the sizes of paper that are not automatically detected. For details about the sizes that can
be detected automatically, see page 172 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". For details
about how to specify sizes, see page 162 "Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer
Function" or "Copying from the Bypass Tray", Copy/ Document Server.
• When copying from the bypass tray, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray", Copy/ Document
Server. When printing from a computer, see page 162 "Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the
Printer Function".
• When the [Panel Key Sound] is turned off, it does not sound if you load paper into the bypass tray.
For details about [Panel Key Sound], see "General Features", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer Function
• If you select [Machine Setting(s)] in [Bypass Tray] under [Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of the
Printer Features menu, the settings made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver
settings. For details, see "System", Print.
• The default of [Bypass Tray] is [Machine Setting(s): Any Type].
• Settings remain valid until they are changed.
• For details about setting printer drivers, see "Printing Documents", Print.
• The default setting for [Printer Bypass Paper Size] in [Tray Paper Settings] is [Auto Detect].
Specifying regular sizes using the control panel
1. Display the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
162
Loading Paper
CXX005
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on the Home screen 4.
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
4. Select the paper size.
5. Press [OK].
6. Close the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
Specifying a custom size paper using the control panel
1. Display the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
163
9. Adding Paper and Toner
CXX005
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on the Home screen 4.
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
4. Press [Custom Size].
If a custom size is already specified, press [Change Size].
5. Press [Horizontal].
6. Enter the horizontal size using the number keys, and then press [ ].
7. Press [Vertical].
8. Enter the vertical size using the number keys, and then press [ ].
9. Press [OK] twice.
10. Close the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
164
) on the top right of the screen.
Loading Paper
Specifying thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies for paper type using the
control panel
• Use A4
or 81/2 × 11
size OHP transparencies, and specify their size.
• Usually only one side of OHP transparencies can be used for printing. Be sure to load them with the
print side down.
• When printing onto OHP transparencies, remove printed sheets one by one.
1. Display the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CXX005
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on the Home screen 4.
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size], and then specify the paper size.
4. Press [OK].
5. Press [ Next].
6. Press [Paper Type: Bypass Tray].
7. Select the proper items, according to the paper type you want to specify.
• Press [OHP (Transparency)] on the [Paper Type] area when loading OHP transparencies.
• To load thin or thick paper, press [Do not Display] on the [Paper Type] area, and then select
the appropriate paper thickness in the [Paper Thickness] area.
165
9. Adding Paper and Toner
8. Press [OK].
9. Close the initial settings screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
• We recommend that you use specified OHP transparencies.
• For details about paper thickness, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
Loading Paper into Tray 3 (LCT)
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Tray 3 (LCT) can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on 81/2 × 11 from Tray 3 (LCT), contact
your service representative.
(mainly North America)
Tray 3 (LCT) can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on A4 from Tray 3 (LCT), contact
your service representative.
• When paper loaded in the right side of Tray 3 (LCT) runs out, paper on the left is automatically
shifted to the right. Do not pull out Tray 3 (LCT) while the tray is moving paper; wait until sounds
stop coming from the tray.
• For the right stack, align the right edge of the paper with the right edge of the tray. For the left
stack, align the left edge of the paper to the left edge of the tray.
166
Loading Paper
1. Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.
CVA017
2. Square the paper and load it print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• Whole tray pulled out
CVA018
• Left half of the tray pulled out
CVA019
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
• You can load paper even if Tray 3 (LCT) is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while
Tray 3 (LCT) is in use.
167
9. Adding Paper and Toner
• Load 30 or more sheets of paper in the left half of the tray.
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
(mainly Europe and Asia)
The large capacity tray (LCT) can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on 81/2 × 11 or B5 JIS
from the large capacity tray (LCT), contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)
The large capacity tray (LCT) can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on A4 or B5 JIS
from the large capacity tray (LCT), contact your service representative.
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then open the right cover of the
large capacity tray (LCT).
DCG019
2. Load paper into the paper tray with the print side down.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DCG020
3. Close the right cover of the large capacity tray (LCT).
168
Loading Paper
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, punched paper, or
copied paper) might not be printed correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Settings for the User Tools
• Copier mode
Specify [Yes] for [Letterhead Setting] in [Input / Output] under the Copier / Document Server
Features menu, and then place the original and paper as shown below.
• Printer mode
Specify [Auto Detect] or [On (Always)] for [Letterhead Setting] in [System] under the Printer
Features menu, and then place the paper as shown below.
For details about the letterhead settings, see "Input / Output", Copy/ Document Server, or
"System", Print.
Original orientation and paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:
Icon
Meaning
Place or load paper scanned or printed side face up.
Place or load paper scanned or printed side face down.
• Original orientation
Original orientation
Exposure glass
ADF
Readable orientation
169
9. Adding Paper and Toner
Original orientation
Unreadable
orientation
Exposure glass
ADF
• Copy
• Scanner
• Paper orientation
• Copier mode
Copy side
Trays 1–4
Tray 3 (LCT)
Large capacity
tray (LCT)
Bypass tray
Trays 1–4
Tray 3 (LCT)
Large capacity
tray (LCT)
Bypass tray
One-sided
Two-sided
• Printer mode
Print side
One-sided
Two-sided
170
Loading Paper
• In copier mode:
• For details about how to make two-sided copies, see page 91 "Duplex Copying".
• In printer mode:
• To print on letterhead paper when [Auto Detect] is specified for [Letterhead Setting], you must
specify [Letterhead] as the paper type in the printer driver's settings.
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, onesided output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all
paper is output facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and twosided printing. Note also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for
one-sided printing.
• For details about how to make two-sided prints, see page 126 "Printing on Both Sides of
Sheets".
171
9. Adding Paper and Toner
Recommended Paper
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.
• If you use paper that curls, either because it is too dry or too damp, a staple clogging or paper jam
may occur.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a
misfeed.
• When you load OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them
correctly, or a misfeed might occur.
Trays 1–4
Paper type and weight
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be
detected automatically:
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
A3 , A4
, B5 JIS
, A5 , B4 JIS
, 81/2 × 11
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
11
, 71/4 × 101/2
172
Paper capacity
550 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Paper size
Paper capacity
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Select the paper size using
the Tray Paper Settings menu:
550 sheets
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
A5
17
13
14
,
, A6 , B6 JIS , 11 ×
, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
, 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 ×
, 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K
, 11 × 15 , 10 × 14
A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4
JIS , B5 JIS , B6 JIS ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 ×
10 ,
71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K
, 11
× 15 , 10 × 14
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
Custom size*1:
550 sheets
Vertical: 90.0–297.0 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–431.8
mm
Vertical: 3.55–11.69 inches
Horizontal: 5.83–17.00
inches
Envelopes
Select the paper size using
the Tray Paper Settings menu:
41/
8
× 91/
2
71/2 , C5 Env
, DL Env
, 37/
8×
, C6 Env
•
: 50 sheets
•
:
Double flap: 15 sheets
Single flap: 25 sheets
173
9. Adding Paper and Toner
*1 When loading paper with a vertical length of more than 279.4 mm (11.0 inches) in Tray 1, use paper
that has a horizontal width of 420 mm (16.6 inches) or less.
Bypass tray
Paper type and weight
52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Paper size
Paper capacity
Paper sizes that can be
detected automatically:
• 100 sheets (up to 10 mm
in height)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
• Thick Paper 1: 40 sheets
A3 , A4
, A5
, A6 ,
B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, B6 JIS
• Thick Paper 2–Thick
Paper 3: 20 sheets
• Thick Paper 4: 16 sheets
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
51/2 × 81/2
52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
,
*1
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11
,
1
1
8 /4 × 14 , 8 /4 × 13 , 8
× 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 ×
1
8 /2 , 8K , 16K
, 12 ×
18 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14
A3 , A4
, A5
, A6 ,
, B6 JIS
B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 8K ,
16K
, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15
, 10 × 14
174
• 100 sheets (up to 10 mm
in height)
• Thick Paper 1: 40 sheets
• Thick Paper 2–Thick
Paper 3: 20 sheets
• Thick Paper 4: 16 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
Paper size
Paper capacity
Custom size*2:
• 100 sheets (up to 10 mm
in height)
Vertical: 90.0–304.8 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–600.0
mm*3
• Thick Paper 1: 40 sheets
• Thick Paper 2–Thick
Paper 3: 20 sheets
• Thick Paper 4: 16 sheets
Vertical: 3.55–12.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.83–23.62
inches*3
, 81/2 × 11
OHP transparencies
A4
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
JIS
Label paper (adhesive labels)
B4 JIS , A4
Envelopes
*1
50 sheets
, B4 JIS , B5
1 sheet
30 sheets
10 sheets
41/
8
× 91/
2
, 37/
71/2
, C5 Env
Env
, DL Env
8×
, C6
*1 Select the paper size. For copier mode, see "Copying onto Regular Size Paper from the Bypass Tray",
Copy/ Document Server. For printer mode, see page 162 "Specifying regular sizes using the control
panel".
*2 Enter the paper size. For copier mode, see page 100 "Copying onto Custom Size Paper from the
Bypass Tray". For printer mode, see page 163 "Specifying a custom size paper using the control
panel".
*3 Paper that has a horizontal length of 432 mm (17.1 inches) or more is prone to creasing, feed failures,
and jamming.
Tray 3 (LCT)
Paper type and weight
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
Paper size
Paper capacity
1000 sheets × 2
A4
81/2 × 11
175
9. Adding Paper and Toner
Paper type and weight
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
Paper size
*1
Paper capacity
1000 sheets × 2
81/2 × 11
A4
*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
Large capacity tray (LCT)
Paper type and weight
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
Paper size
Paper capacity
1500 sheets
A4
81/2 × 11
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–
110 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
*1
1500 sheets
B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11
A4 , B5 JIS
*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
Paper Thickness
Paper Thickness*1
176
Paper weight
Thin Paper*2
52–59 g/m2 (14–15 lb. Bond)
Plain Paper 1
60–74 g/m2 (16–20 lb. Bond)
Plain Paper 2
75–81 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond)
Middle Thick
82–105 g/m2 (20–28 lb. Bond)
Thick Paper 1
106–169 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)
Thick Paper 2
170–220 g/m2 (65–80 lb. Cover)
Recommended Paper
Paper Thickness*1
Paper weight
Thick Paper 3
221–256 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover–140 lb. Index)
Thick Paper 4
257–300 g/m2 (140 lb. Index–110 lb. Cover)
*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight.
Change the paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
*2 Depending on the type of thin paper, the edges may crease or the paper may be misfed.
• Certain types of paper, such as translucent paper or OHP transparencies, may produce noise
when delivered. This noise does not indicate a problem and print quality is unaffected.
• The paper capacity described in the tables above is an example. Actual paper capacity might be
lower, depending on the paper type.
• When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark of the paper tray.
• If multiple sheet feeding occurs, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the bypass
tray.
• Flatten out curled sheets before loading them.
• Depending on the paper sizes and types, the copy/print speed may be slower than usual.
• When loading thick paper of 106–300 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover), see page 178 "Thick
paper".
• When loading envelopes, see page 179 "Envelopes".
• When copying or printing onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different
depending on which function you are using. For details, see page 169 "Loading Orientation-fixed
Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• If you load paper of the same size and same type in two or more trays, the machine automatically
feeds from one of the trays in which [Yes] is selected for [Apply Auto Paper Select] when the first
tray in use runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. This saves interrupting a
copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. You can specify the paper
type of the paper trays under [Paper Type]. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings. For the setting procedure of the Auto Tray Switching function, see
"General Features", Copy/ Document Server.
• When loading label paper:
• We recommend that you use specified label paper.
• Press [Bypass], and then select the appropriate paper thickness for [Paper Type].
• When loading OHP transparencies:
• When copying onto OHP transparencies, see "Copying onto OHP Transparencies", Copy/
Document Server.
177
9. Adding Paper and Toner
• When printing on OHP transparencies from the computer, see page 165 "Specifying thick
paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies for paper type using the control panel".
• Fan OHP transparencies thoroughly whenever you use them. This prevents OHP
transparencies from sticking together, and from feeding incorrectly.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
• When loading translucent paper:
• When loading translucent paper, always use long grain paper, and set the paper direction
according to the grain.
• Translucent paper easily absorbs humidity and becomes curled. Remove curl in the translucent
paper before loading.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
Thick paper
This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning thick paper.
When loading thick paper of 106–300 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover), follow the
recommendations below to prevent misfeeds and loss of image quality.
• Store all your paper in the same environment - a room where the temperature is 20–25°C (68–
77°F) and the humidity is 30–65%.
• When loading paper in Trays 1–4, be sure to load at least 20 sheets. Also, be sure to position the
side fences flush against the paper stack.
• Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick smooth paper. To prevent such problems, be
sure to fan smooth paper thoroughly before loading them. If paper continues to become jammed or
feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the bypass tray.
• When loading thick paper, set the paper direction according to its grain, as shown in the following
diagram:
Direction of
paper grain
178
Trays 1-4
Tray 3
Large capacity
(LCT)
tray (LCT)
Not
Not
recommended
recommended
Bypass tray
Recommended Paper
• Select [Thick Paper 1], [Thick Paper 2], [Thick Paper 3], or [Thick Paper 4] as the paper thickness in
[Tray Paper Settings].
• Even if thick paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not
be possible, depending on the paper type.
• Prints might have prominent vertical creases.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.
Envelopes
This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning envelopes.
• Do not use window envelopes.
• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• Only envelopes that are at least 148 mm (5.9 inches) wide and whose flaps are open can be
loaded in the orientation.
• When loading envelopes in the orientation, load them with flaps fully open. Otherwise, they
might not feed into the machine.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air from inside, flatten out all four
edges. If they are bent or curled, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by
running a pencil or ruler across them.
In copier mode
The way to load envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. When copying
onto envelopes, load them according to the applicable orientation shown below:
179
9. Adding Paper and Toner
How to load envelopes
Orientation of
envelopes
Exposure glass
Trays 1–4
Bypass tray
Side-opening
envelopes
• Flaps: open
• Flaps: open
• Flaps: open
• Bottom side of
envelopes: toward
the left of the
machine
• Bottom side of
envelopes: toward
the right of the
machine
• Bottom side of
envelopes: toward
the left of the
machine
• Side to be
scanned: face
down
• Side to be printed:
face up
• Side to be printed:
face down
• Flaps: closed
• Flaps: closed
• Flaps: closed
• Bottom side of
envelopes: toward
the back of the
machine
• Bottom side of
envelopes: toward
the back of the
machine
• Bottom side of
envelopes: toward
the back of the
machine
• Side to be
scanned: face
down
• Side to be printed:
face up
• Side to be printed:
face down
Side-opening
envelopes
When loading envelopes, specify the envelope size and thickness. For details, see "Copying onto
Envelopes", Copy/ Document Server.
In printer mode
The way to load envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. When printing
onto envelopes, load them according to the applicable orientation shown below:
180
Recommended Paper
How to load envelopes
Types of envelopes
Trays 1–4
Bypass tray
Side-opening
envelopes
• Flaps: open
• Flaps: open
• Bottom side of envelopes:
toward the right of the
machine
• Bottom side of envelopes:
toward the left of the machine
• Side to be printed: face down
• Side to be printed: face up
Side-opening
envelopes
• Flaps: closed
• Flaps: closed
• Bottom side of envelopes:
toward the back of the
machine
• Bottom side of envelopes:
toward the back of the
machine
• Side to be printed: face up
• Side to be printed: face down
When loading envelopes, select "Envelope" as the paper types using both [Tray Paper Settings]
and printer driver and specify the thickness of envelopes. For details, see "Printing on Envelopes",
Print.
To print on envelopes that are loaded with their short edges against the machine body, rotate the
print image by 180 degrees using the printer driver.
Recommended envelopes
For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
For details about the sizes of envelopes you can load, see page 172 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
• To get better output quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left, top, and bottom print
margin, to at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.
181
9. Adding Paper and Toner
• Output quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have differing thicknesses. Print
one or two envelopes to check print quality.
• Copied or printed sheets are delivered to the internal tray even if you specified a different tray.
• Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.
• Check the envelopes are not damp.
• High temperature and high humidity conditions can reduce print quality and cause envelopes to
become creased.
• Depending on the environment, copying or printing on envelopes may wrinkle them even if they
are recommended.
• Certain types of envelopes might come out creased, dirtied, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid color on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the envelope make it
thicker.
182
Adding Toner
Adding Toner
This section explains precautions when adding toner, how to send faxes or scanned documents when
the toner has run out, and how to dispose of used toner.
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
183
9. Adding Paper and Toner
• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.
• Always replace the toner cartridge when a notification appears on the machine.
• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures above 35°C (95°F), or
high humidity.
• Store toner horizontally.
• Do not shake the toner cartridge with its mouth down after removing it. Residual toner may scatter.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove toner cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
Follow the instruction on the screen regarding how to replace a toner cartridge.
• If "Toner Cartridge is almost empty." appears, the toner has almost run out. Have a replacement
toner cartridge at hand.
• If appears when there is a lot of toner, follow the toner replacement instructions that appear on
the screen. Pull out the cartridge, and then reinstall it.
• You can check the name of the required toner and the replacement procedure using the [ Add
Toner] screen.
• For details about how to check contact number where you can order supplies, see "Inquiry",
Maintenance and Specifications.
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out
When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator on the display lights. Note that even if there is no
toner left, you can still send faxes or scanned documents.
• If number of communications executed after the toner has run out and not listed in the automatically
output Journal exceeds 200, communication is not possible.
1. Display the initial facsimile or scanner screen.
• When using the standard operation panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press the [Facsimile] icon or the
[Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
184
Adding Toner
CXX002
• When using the Smart Operation Panel
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then
press the [Fax] icon or the [Scanner] icon on the Home screen 4.
• Any reports are not printed.
Disposing of Used Toner
This section describes what to do with used toner.
Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of the
container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you discard it
by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.
185
9. Adding Paper and Toner
186
10. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes basic troubleshooting procedures.
When a Status Icon Is Displayed
This section describes the status icons displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.
Status Icon
: Paper Misfeed icon
Status
Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.
For details about removing jammed paper, see "Removing
Jammed Paper", Troubleshooting.
: Original Misfeed icon
Appears when an original misfeed occurs.
For details about removing jammed paper, see "Removing
Jammed Paper", Troubleshooting.
: Load Paper icon
Appears when paper runs out.
For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper",
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper.
: Add Toner icon
Appears when toner runs out.
For details about adding toner, see "Adding Toner",
Maintenance and Specifications.
: Add Staple icon
Appears when staples run out.
For details about adding staples, see "Adding Staples",
Maintenance and Specifications.
: Waste Toner Full icon
Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
Contact your service representative.
: Hole Punch Receptacle Full icon
Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
For details about removing punch waste, see "Removing
Punch Waste", Troubleshooting.
: Service Call icon
Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires
maintenance.
: Open Cover icon
Appears when one or more covers of the machine are
open.
187
10. Troubleshooting
When the Indicator Lamp for the [Check Status]
Key Is Lit or Flashing
If the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key lights up or flashes, press the [Check Status] key to
display the [Check Status] screen. Check the status of each function in the [Check Status] screen.
[Check Status] screen
1
2
4
3
DDH004
1. [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab
Indicates the status of the machine and each function.
2. [Check]
If an error occurs in the machine or a function, press [Check] to view details.
Pressing [Check] displays an error message or the corresponding function screen. Check the error message
displayed on the function screen and take the appropriate action. For details about how to resolve the
problems described in error messages, see "When Messages Appear", Troubleshooting.
3. Messages
Displays a message that indicates the status of the machine and each function.
4. Status icons
The status icons that can be displayed are described below:
: The function is performing a job.
: An error has occurred on the machine.
: The function cannot be used because an error has occurred in the function or machine. This icon may also
appear if the toner is running low.
The following table explains problems that cause the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key to light or
flash.
188
When the Indicator Lamp for the [Check Status] Key Is Lit or Flashing
Problem
Cause
Solution
Documents and reports do
not print out.
The paper output tray is full.
Remove the prints from the tray.
Documents and reports do
not print out.
There is no paper left.
Load paper. For details about loading
paper, see "Loading Paper", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.
An error has occurred.
A function which has the
status "Error Occurred" in
the [Check Status] screen is
defective.
Press [Check] in the function which the
error has occurred. Then check the
displayed message, and take
appropriate action. For details about
error messages and their solutions, see
"When Messages Appear",
Troubleshooting.
You can use other functions normally.
The machine is unable to
connect to the network.
A network error has
occurred.
• Check that the machine is
correctly connected to the
network and that the machine is
correctly set. For details about
how to connect the network, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about connecting to
the network, contact your
administrator.
• If the indicator lamp is still lit even
after you try to solve the problem
as described here, contact your
service representative.
189
10. Troubleshooting
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound
The following table describes the meaning of the various beep patterns that the machine produces to
alert users about left originals and other machine conditions.
Beep pattern
Meaning
Cause
Single short beep
Panel/screen input
accepted.
A control panel or screen key was
pressed.
Short, then long beep
Panel/screen input rejected.
An invalid key was pressed on the
control panel or screen, or the entered
password was incorrect.
Single long beep
Job completed successfully.
A Copier/Document Server Features
job has finished.
2 long beeps
Machine has warmed up.
When the power is turned on or the
machine exits Sleep mode, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
5 long beeps
Soft alert
An auto reset was performed through
the simple screen of the Copier/
Document Server function, the
Facsimile function, or the Scanner
function.
5 long beeps repeated four
times.
Soft alert
An original has been left on the
exposure glass or paper tray is empty.
5 short beeps repeated five
times.
Strong alert
The machine requires user attention
because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.
• Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert users of a paper
jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and closed repeatedly within a short
space of time, the beep alert might continue, even after normal status has resumed.
• You can enable or disable beep alerts. For details about Panel Key Sound, see "General
Features", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
190
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
When You Have Problems Operating the
Machine
Problem
Cause
Solution
When the machine is turned Functions other than the
on, the only icon that
copier function are not yet
appears on the home screen ready.
is the [Copier] icon. (When
using the standard operation
panel)
Wait a little longer.
The machine has just been
turned on and the User Tools
screen is displayed, but the
User Tools menu has items
missing.
Functions other than the
copier function are not yet
ready. Time required varies
by function. Functions
appear in the User Tools
menu when they become
ready for use.
Wait a little longer.
The indicator lamp remains
lit and the machine does not
enter Sleep mode even
though the [Energy Saver]
key was pressed.
In some cases, the machine
does not enter Sleep mode
when the [Energy Saver] key
is pressed.
Before you press the [Energy Saver]
key, check that Sleep mode can be
enabled. For details about enabling
Sleep mode, see "Saving Energy",
Getting Started.
The display is turned off.
The machine is in Sleep
mode.
When using the standard operation
panel
Press the [Energy Saver] key or
the [Check Status] key to exit
Sleep mode.
When using the Smart Operation
Panel
Touch the display panel or press
one of the keys on the control
panel to exit Sleep mode.
Nothing happens when the
[Check Status] key or the
[Energy Saver] key is
pressed.
The power is turned off.
Make sure the main power indicator is
off, and then turn on the power.
191
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
The power turns off
automatically.
192
Cause
Solution
The Weekly Timer setting is
set to [Main Power Off].
Change the Weekly Timer setting. For
details about the Weekly Timer setting,
see "Timer Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User
displayed.
Code Authentication.
For details about how to log in when
User Code Authentication is enabled,
see "When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed", Getting Started.
The Authentication screen
appears.
Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication,
LDAP Authentication or
Integration Server
Authentication is set.
Enter your login user name and user
password. For details about the
Authentication screen, see "When the
Authentication Screen is Displayed",
Getting Started.
An error message is still
displayed, even if misfed
paper is removed.
Paper is still jammed in the
tray.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the procedures displayed on
the control panel. For details about
removing jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.
An error message is still
displayed, even if the
indicated cover is closed.
One or more covers that are
not indicated are still open.
Close all the covers of the machine.
Original images are printed
on the reverse side of the
paper.
You may have loaded the
paper incorrectly.
Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see "Loading
Paper", Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
Problem
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Cause
Using curled paper often
causes misfeeds, soiled
paper edges, or slipped
positions while staple or
stack printing is performed.
Solution
• Flatten the paper with your hands
to straighten out the curl.
• Load the paper up side down so
that the curled edges face
downward. For details about
recommended paper, see
"Recommended Paper", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.
• Place cut paper on a flat surface
to prevent paper from curling,
and do not lean it against the
wall. For details about the proper
way to store paper, see "Paper
Storage", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The tray's side or end fences
may not be set properly.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• Check that the side or end fences
are set properly. Also, check that
the side fences are locked. For
details about setting the side and
end fences, see "Changing the
Paper Size", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.
193
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Cause
Paper of undetectable size
has been loaded.
Solution
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• If you load a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you need
to specify the paper size with the
control panel. For details about
specifying paper size using the
control panel, see "Changing to a
Size That Is Not Automatically
Detected", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
There is a foreign object on
the output tray.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• Do not place anything on the
output tray.
194
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
tray that is not set for duplex
printing.
Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
in [Tray Paper Settings] to enable
duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
type that cannot be used for
duplex printing.
In [Tray Paper Settings], select a paper
type that can be used for duplex
printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see "Tray Paper
Settings", Connecting the Machine/
System Settings.
Paper does not align neatly
when it is output from the
internal shift tray.
The paper press attached to
the paper output slot of the
internal shift tray is pointed
towards the back or front of
the tray.
Adjust the paper press so that it points
in the same direction as the paper that
is output.
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
Problem
Cause
Solution
The machine does not turn
off in 6 minutes after the
main power is turned off.
The machine cannot perform
the shutdown procedure.
Repeat the shutdown procedure. If the
machine does not turn off, disconnect
the machine's power cord from the
wall outlet.
An error has occurred when
the Address Book is
changed from the display
panel or Web Image
Monitor.
The Address Book cannot be Wait a while, and then retry the
changed while you delete
operation.
the multiple stored
documents.
Cannot use Web Image
Monitor to print documents
stored in Document Server.
When print volume limits are
specified, users cannot print
beyond their print volume
limit. Print jobs selected by
users who have reached
their print volume limits will
be canceled.
The function does not run or
cannot be used.
If you cannot carry out your
job, it may be that the
machine is being used by
another function.
Paper is bent.
• For details about specifying print
volume limits, see Security Guide.
• To view the status of a print job,
see [Print Job History]. In Web
Image Monitor, click [Job] on the
[Status/Information] menu. And
then click [Print Job History] in
"Document Server".
Wait until the current job is completed
before trying again.
For details about Function
Compatibility, see "When Multiple
Functions Cannot Be Executed
Simultaneously", Troubleshooting.
Paper may be bent when it is Change the output tray to the finisher
ejected from the finisher
shift tray.
upper tray.
• If you cannot make copies as you want because of paper type, paper size, or paper capacity
problems, use the recommended paper. For details about recommended paper, see page 172
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
When Multiple Functions Cannot Be Executed Simultaneously
If you cannot carry out your job, it may be that the machine is being used by another function.
195
10. Troubleshooting
Wait until the current job is completed before trying again. In certain cases, you can carry out another
job using a different function while the current job is being performed.
For details about Function Compatibility, see "Function Compatibility", Troubleshooting.
196
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/
Document Server Function
• If you cannot make copies as you want because of the paper type, paper size or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. For details about recommended paper, see page 172
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot delete the folder
because it contains locked
files. Please contact the file
administrator."
The folder cannot be deleted Unlock the locked original to delete it.
because it contains a locked For details about locked files, see
original.
Security Guide.
"Cannot detect original
size."
The original placed on the
exposure glass is a nonstandard size.
• Place the original on the exposure
glass again. Face the original
down.
• If the machine cannot detect the
size of the original, specify the
size manually - do not use Auto
Paper Select mode or the Auto
Reduce/Enlarge function. For
details about specifying the
settings, see "Sizes Detectable
with Auto Paper Select", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.
"Cannot detect original
size."
No original has been
placed, or the original
placed on the exposure
glass is a nonstandard size.
• Place the original correctly.
• Specify the original size.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the exposure
glass cover or the Auto Document
Feeder (ADF) triggers the
automatic original size detection
process. Lift the exposure glass
cover or the ADF 30 degrees or
more.
197
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Cannot display preview of
this page."
Cause
The image data may have
been corrupted.
Solution
Press [Exit] to display the preview
screen without a thumbnail.
If the selected document contains
several pages, press [Switch] on the
"Display Page" area to change the
page, and then a preview of the next
page will appear.
198
"Cannot punch this paper
size."
The Punch function cannot
be used with paper size
selected.
For details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for Punch Unit (Internal
Finisher SR3130)", "Specifications for
Punch Unit (Finisher SR3140, Booklet
Finisher SR3150)", or "Specifications
for Punch Unit (Finisher SR3160,
Booklet Finisher SR3170)",
Maintenance and Specifications.
"Cannot staple paper of this
size."
The Staple function cannot
be used with the paper size
selected.
Select an appropriate paper size. For
details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for Internal Finisher
SR3130", "Specifications for Finisher
SR3140", "Specifications for Booklet
Finisher SR3150", "Specifications for
Finisher SR3160", "Specifications for
Booklet Finisher SR3170", or
"Specifications for Internal Finisher
SR3180", Maintenance and
Specifications.
"Check paper size."
An irregular paper size is
set.
If you press the [Start] key, the copy
will start using the selected paper.
"Duplex is not available with
this paper size."
A paper size not available in Select an appropriate paper size. For
Duplex mode.
details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for the Main Unit",
Maintenance and Specifications.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of sheets that can be
used. Copying will be
stopped."
The number of pages the
user is permitted to copy has
been exceeded.
For details about how to check the
number of copies available per user,
see Security Guide.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Message
"File being stored exceeded
max. number of pages per
file. Copying will be
stopped."
Cause
The scanned originals have
too many pages to store as
one document.
Solution
Press [Exit], and then store again with
an appropriate number of pages.
"Magazine or Booklet mode You selected the
is not available due to mixed "Magazine" or "Booklet"
image mode."
function for originals
scanned using different
functions, such as copy and
printer.
Make sure originals to which the
"Magazine" or "Booklet" function is
applied are scanned using the same
function.
"Maximum number of sets is
n."
The number of copies
exceeds the maximum copy
quantity.
You can change the maximum copy
quantity from [Max. Copy Quantity] in
[General Features] under [Copier /
Document Server Features]. For details
about Max. Copy Quantity, see
"General Features", Copy/ Document
Server.
The number of scanned
originals exceeds the
number of pages that can be
stored in memory.
Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Clear Memory] to cancel the scanning
data and not copy.
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)
"Memory is full. nn originals
have been scanned. Press
[Print] to copy scanned
originals. Do not remove
remaining originals."
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)
"Press [Continue] to scan
and copy remaining
originals."
The machine checked if the
Remove all copies, and then press
remaining originals should
[Continue] to continue copying. Press
be copied, after the scanned [Stop] to stop copying.
originals were printed.
"Rotate Sort is not available
with this paper size."
A size of paper for which
Select an appropriate paper size. For
Rotate Sort is not available is details about paper sizes, see "Sort",
selected.
Copy/ Document Server.
199
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Stapling capacity
exceeded."
The number of sheets per set
is over the staple capacity.
Check the stapler capacity. For details
about the stapler capacity, see
"Specifications for Internal Finisher
SR3130", "Specifications for Finisher
SR3140", "Specifications for Booklet
Finisher SR3150", "Specifications for
Finisher SR3160", "Specifications for
Booklet Finisher SR3170", or
"Specifications for Internal Finisher
SR3180", Maintenance and
Specifications.
"The selected folder is
locked. Please contact the
file administrator."
An attempt was made to edit
or use a locked folder.
For details about locked folders, see
Security Guide.
• If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in [Input / Output] of User Tools to [On], even if the
memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The machine will make
copies of the scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed to scan and to copy the
remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. For details about
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, see "Input / Output", Copy/ Document Server.
200
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function
Messages Displayed When You Use the
Facsimile Function
Message
"Cannot find the specified
path. Please check the
settings."
"Error occurred, and
transmission was
cancelled."
Cause
Solution
The name of the computer or
folder entered as the
destination is wrong.
Check that the computer name and the
folder name for the destination are
correct.
• Original jammed during Press [Exit], and then send the
Immediate Transmission. documents again.
• A problem occurred in
the machine, or noise
occurred on the
telephone line.
"Functional problem
occurred. Stopped
processing."
The power was turned off
while the machine was
receiving a document by
Internet Fax.
Even if you turn on the power
immediately, depending on the mail
server, the machine might not be able
to resume receiving the Internet Fax if
the timeout period has not expired.
Wait until the mail server's timeout
period has expired, and then resume
receiving the Internet Fax. For details
about receiving the Internet Fax,
contact your administrator.
"Functional problems with
facsimile. Data will be
initialized."
There is a problem with the
fax.
Record the code number shown on the
screen, and then contact your service
representative. Other functions can be
used.
"Memory is full. Cannot
The memory is full.
scan more. Transmission will
be stopped."
If you press [Exit], the machine returns
to standby mode and starts transmitting
the stored pages.
Check the pages that have not been
sent using the Communication Result
Report, and then resend those pages.
"Put original back, check it
and press the Start key."
Original jammed during
Memory Transmission.
Press [Exit], and then send the
documents again.
201
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Some page(s) are near
blank."
Cause
The first page of the
document is almost blank.
Solution
The original's blank side might have
been scanned. Be sure to place your
originals correctly. For details about
determining the cause of blank pages,
see "Detecting Blank Pages", Fax.
• Settings that can be confirmed in System Settings or Facsimile Features on the control panel can
also be confirmed from Web Image Monitor. For details about how to confirm the settings from
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• If the paper tray runs out of paper, "There is no paper. Load paper." appears on the screen,
prompting you to add paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as
usual, even if the message appears on the screen. You can turn this function on or off with
"Parameter Settings". For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax.
When Network Setting Problems Occur
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[13-10]
Cause
The alias telephone number
you entered is already
registered on the gatekeeper
by another device.
Solution
• Check that the correct alias phone
number is listed in [H.323
Settings] of [Facsimile Features].
For details about H.323 Settings,
see "Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[13-11]
Cannot access gatekeeper.
• Check that the correct gate
keeper address is listed in [H.323
Settings] of [Facsimile Features].
For details about H.323 Settings,
see "Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
202
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
Cause
User name registration is
refused by SIP server.
[13-17]
Solution
• Correct that the correct SIP Server
IP Address and SIP User Name
are listed in [SIP Settings] of
[Facsimile Features]. For details
about SIP Settings, see "Initial
Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
Cannot access SIP server.
[13-18]
• Check that the correct SIP Server
IP Address is listed in [SIP
Settings] of [Facsimile Features].
For details about SIP Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[13-24]
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[13-25]
The password registered for
the SIP server is not the same
as the password registered
for this machine.
For details about network problems,
contact your administrator.
In [Effective Protocol], the IP
address is not enabled, or an
incorrect IP address has been
registered.
• Check that IPv4 in [Effective
Protocol] is set to "Active" in
[System Settings]. For details
about effective protocol, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the correct IPv4
address is specified for the
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about IPv4 address, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
203
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[13-26]
Cause
Solution
The "Effective Protocol" and
"SIP Server IP Address"
settings are different, or an
incorrect IP address has been
registered.
• Check that the correct IP address
is specified for the machine in
[System Settings]. For details
about IP address, see "Interface
Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[14-01]
The DNS server, SMTP
server, or folder specified for
transfer to was not found, or
the destination for Internet
Fax around (not through) the
SMTP server could not be
found.
• Check that the following settings
in [System Settings] are listed
correctly.
• DNS server
• Server name and IP address
for the SMTP Server
For details about these settings,
see "Interface Settings" or "File
Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the folder for transfer is
correctly specified.
• Check that the computer in which
the folder for transfer is specified
is correctly operated.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact the
administrator of the destinations.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
204
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[14-09]
Cause
Solution
E-mail transmission was
rejected by SMTP
authentication, POP before
SMTP authentication, or login
authentication of the
computer in which the folder
for transfer is specified.
• Check that User Name and
Password for the following
settings in [System Settings] are
listed correctly.
• SMTP Authentication
• POP before SMTP
• Fax Email Account
For details about these settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the user ID and
password for the computer with
the folder for forwarding are
correctly specified.
• Check that the folder for
forwarding is correctly specified.
• Confirm that the computer with the
folder for forwarding is properly
working.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[14-33]
E-mail addresses for the
machine and the
administrator are not
registered.
• Check that the correct e-mail
Address is listed in [Fax Email
Account] of [System Settings]. For
details about Fax Email Account,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
205
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
Cause
No POP3/IMAP4 server
address is registered.
[15-01]
Solution
• Check that the correct Server
Name or Server Address is listed
in [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings] of
[System Settings]. For details
about POP3 / IMAP4 Settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
Cannot log in to the POP3/
IMAP4 server.
[15-02]
• Check that the correct User Name
and Password are listed in [Fax
Email Account] of [System
Settings]. For details about Fax
Email Account, see "File Transfer",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[15-03]
No machine e-mail address
is specified.
• Check that the correct machine email address is specified in
[System Settings]. For details
about settings of e-mail address,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
206
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
Cause
Cannot find the DNS server
or POP3/IMAP4 server.
[15-11]
Solution
• Check that the following settings
in [System Settings] are listed
correctly.
• IP address of the DNS
Server
• the server name or IP
address of the POP3/
IMAP4 server
• the port number of the
POP3/IMAP4 server
• Reception Protocol
For details about these settings,
see "Interface Settings" or "File
Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[15-12]
Cannot log in to the POP3/
IMAP4 server.
• Check that the following settings
in [System Settings] are listed
correctly.
• the user name and password
for [Fax Email Account]
• the user name and password
for POP before SMTP
authentication
For details about these settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
207
10. Troubleshooting
• Settings that can be confirmed in System Settings or Facsimile Features on the control panel can
also be confirmed from Web Image Monitor. For details about how to confirm the settings from
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• If the paper tray runs out of paper, "There is no paper. Load paper." appears on the screen,
prompting you to add paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as
usual, even if the message appears on the screen. You can turn this function on or off with
"Parameter Settings". For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax.
• If "Check whether there are any network problems." appears, the machine is not correctly
connected to the network or the settings of the machine are not correct. If you do not need to
connect to a network, you can specify the setting so this message is not displayed, and then the
[Check Status] key no longer lights up. For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings",
Fax. If you reconnect the machine to the network, be sure to set "Display" by configuring the
appropriate User Parameter.
When the Remote Fax Function Cannot Be Used
Message
208
Cause
Solution
"Authentication with remote
machine failed. Check
remote machine's auth.
settings."
User authentication on the
main machine has failed.
For details about user authentication,
see Security Guide.
"Authentication with remote
machine failed. Check
remote machine's auth.
settings."
User Code Authentication is
set on the device connected
via the remote fax function.
The remote fax function does not
support User Code Authentication.
Disable the User Code Authentication
on the main machine.
"Authentication with remote
machine failed. Check
remote machine's auth.
settings."
The user does not have
permission to use the function
on the main machine.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function
Message
"Check whether there are
any network problems."
[16-00]
Cause
Solution
• An IP address has not
been registered for the
main machine.
• Check that the correct IP address
is specified for the machine in
[System Settings]. For details
about the IP address of the main
machine, contact your
administrator.
• A network is not
connected properly.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Connection with the remote A network error occurred
machine has failed. Check
while you were using the
the remote machine status." remote fax function.
• Check that the main machine
supports the remote fax function.
• Check that the main machine is
working normally.
• Check that the correct IP address
or host name is set for the main
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about these settings,
contact your administrator.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.
"Connection with the remote The main machine's power is
machine has failed. Check
off.
the remote machine status."
Turn on the main machine's power.
"Connection with the remote A timeout error occurred
machine has failed. Check
while an attempt was made
the remote machine status." to connect the device via
remote fax function.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• Check that the main machine is
working correctly.
• For details about connection with
main machine, see "Sending/
Receiving Documents Using a
Remote Machine (Remote Fax)",
Fax.
209
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
"Connection with the remote
machine has failed. There is
a problem with the remote
machine structure. Contact
the administrator."
The settings or machine
configurations for using the
remote fax function to
connect to the main machine
are incorrect.
"Transfer error has occured.
Check the status of the
remote machine."
A network error occurred
during transfer.
Solution
For details about the settings and
machine configurations for using the
remote fax function to connect to a
main machine, contact your
administrator.
• Check that the correct IP address
or host name is set for the main
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about these settings,
contact your administrator.
• Check that the main machine is
working correctly.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about transmission,
contact your administrator.
"The HDD of the remote
machine is full."
210
The hard disk became full
after using the remote fax
function to scan an original.
Delete unnecessary files.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer
Function
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the display panel, error logs or reports. If
other messages appear, follow their instructions.
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Printer Function
• Before turning off the power, see page 79 "Turning On/Off the Power".
Message
Cause
Solution
"Hardware Problem:
Ethernet"
An error has occurred in the
Ethernet interface.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Hardware Problem: HDD"
An error has occurred in the
hard disk.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Hardware Problem: USB"
An error has occurred in the
USB interface.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Hardware Problem:
Wireless Card"
• The wireless LAN board
has malfunctioned.
(A “wireless LAN board” or
“Bluetooth interface unit” is
referred to as a “wireless
card”.)
• The wireless LAN board
you are using is not
compatible with this
machine.
Turn off the power, and then confirm
the wireless LAN board is inserted
correctly. And then, turn on the
power again. If the message
appears again, contact your service
representative.
211
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Hardware Problem:
Wireless Card"
(A "wireless LAN board" or
"Bluetooth interface unit" is
referred to as a "wireless
card".)
"Load following paper in n.
To force print, select
another tray and press
[Continue]."
Cause
Solution
• The Bluetooth interface
unit was connected while
the machine was turned
on.
Turn off the power, and then confirm
the Bluetooth interface unit is inserted
correctly. After confirmation, turn on
the power again. If the message
appears again, contact your service
representative.
• The Bluetooth interface
unit was removed while
the machine was turned
on.
The printer driver settings are
incorrect or the tray does not
contain paper of the size
selected in the printer driver.
Check that the printer driver settings
are correct, and then load paper of
the size selected in the printer driver
into the input tray. For details about
how to change the paper size, see
"Changing the Paper Size", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.
"Paper in staple tray. Open
cover and remove paper."
If printing is stopped before it is
finished, paper may remain in
the finisher.
Remove the paper remaining in the
finisher.
"Paper size and type are
mismatched. Select another
tray from the following and
press [Continue]. To cancel
job, press [Job Reset].
Paper size and type can
also be changed in User
Tools."
The printer driver settings are
incorrect or the tray does not
contain paper of the size or
type selected in the printer
driver.
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)
• Check that the printer driver
settings are correct, and then
load paper of the size selected
in the printer driver into the
input tray. For details about
how to change the paper size,
see "Changing the Paper Size",
Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.
• Select the tray manually to
continue printing, or cancel a
print job. For details about how
to select the tray manually, or
cancel a print job, see "If an
Error Occurs with the Specified
Paper Size and Type", Print.
212
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
Message
"Paper type of n is
mismatched. Select another
tray from the following and
press [Continue]. Paper
type can also be changed
in User Tools."
Cause
Solution
The type of the paper in the tray Select a tray containing paper that is
does not match the paper type the same type as the specified paper
specified in the printer driver.
type.
(A tray name is placed at
n.)
"Parallel I/F board has a
problem."
An error has occurred in the
IEEE 1284 interface board.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Printer font error."
An error has occurred in the
font settings.
Contact your service representative.
"Problems with the wireless
card. Please call service."
The machine has detected a
Bluetooth failure, or it could not
detect a Bluetooth unit. It may
be incorrectly installed.
Check that the Bluetooth unit is
installed properly, or contact your
service representative.
The tray selected for other
pages is the same as the one
for slip sheets.
Reset the job. Be sure the tray you
select for slip sheets is not providing
paper for other pages.
(A "wireless LAN board" or
"Bluetooth unit" is referred
to as a "wireless card".)
"Cannot print because both
the main and designation
(chapter) sheets are set to
the same paper tray. Press
[Job Reset] to cancel the
job. To print the job again
specify different trays."
213
10. Troubleshooting
When using direct print from a memory storage device
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded the limit value for
total data size of the
selected files. Cannot select
more files."
• The size of the selected
file exceeds 1 GB.
Files or groups of files larger than 1 GB
cannot be printed.
• The total size of the
selected files exceeds 1
GB.
• When the total size of the multiple
files that are selected exceeds 1
GB, select files separately.
• When the size of the selected file
exceeds 1 GB, print from a
memory storage device using a
function other than the Direct
printing function.
You cannot select files of different
formats at the same time.
"Unable to access the
specified memory storage
device."
• An error occurred
when the machine
accessed the memory
storage device or a file
stored on the memory
storage device.
Save the file to a different memory
storage device, and then print again.
• An error occurred
when the user used the
Direct printing function
to print from a memory
storage device.
Messages Printed on the Error Logs or Reports When You Use the Printer
Function
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on
the error logs or reports.
214
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
When print jobs are canceled
Message
Cause
Solution
"91: Error"
Printing was canceled by the
auto job cancel function due
to a command error.
Check that the data is valid.
"A job via the network that
was not printed exists
because an error occurred.
It was stored as a job not
printed."
Jobs with errors were stored
because an error occurred
with a print job via the
network while the error job
storing function was
enabled.
Contact your administrator to check
whether the machine is connected
correctly to the network. For details
about how to check and print jobs
stored when print configuration errors
occur, see "Printing of Documents
Stored When Print Configuration Errors
Occur", Print.
"Error occurred while
processing an Unauthorized
Copy Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
You tried to store a file in the
Document Server when the
[Unauthorized Copy
Prevention] was specified.
On the printer driver, select a job type
other than [Document Server] in "Job
Type:" or deselect [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention].
"Error occurred while
processing an Unauthorized
Copy Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
The [Enter User Text:] field
on the [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention for Pattern
Details] screen is blank.
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Effects] in "Menu:".
Select [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention], and then click [Details...]
to display [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention for Pattern Details]. Enter
text in [Enter User Text:].
"Error occurred while
processing an Unauthorized
Copy Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
The resolution is set to a
value less than 600 dpi
when [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention] is specified.
On the printer driver, set the resolution
to 600 dpi or higher, or cancel
[Unauthorized Copy Prevention].
"Error occurred while
processing an Unauthorized
Copy Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
A color other than black was Specify black as the pattern color.
specified as the pattern color
when a command was used
to specify Unauthorized
Copy Prevention for Pattern
for a document and print it.
215
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Error occurred while
processing an Unauthorized
Copy Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
In [Administrator Tools]
under [System Settings],
priority was specified to be
given to Unauthorized Copy
Prevention Printing set on this
machine.
Cancel [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention Printing] for the printer
driver. For details about how to cancel
the settings, see the printer driver Help.
"Collate Cancelled"
Collate was canceled.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.
"You reach the usage limit.
This job has been
cancelled."
The number of pages the
user is permitted to print has
been exceeded.
For details about print volume use
limitation, see Security Guide.
"Receiving data failed."
Data reception was aborted. Resend the data.
"Sending data failed."
The machine received a
command to stop
transmission from the printer
driver.
Check if the computer is working
correctly.
"The selected paper size is
not supported. This job has
been cancelled."
Job reset is automatically
performed if the specified
paper size is incorrect.
Specify the correct paper size, and
then print the file again.
"The selected paper type is
not supported. This job has
been cancelled."
Job reset is automatically
performed if the specified
paper type is incorrect.
Specify the correct paper type, and
then print the file again.
When there is a problem with the print settings
Message
216
Cause
Solution
"Booklet/Half Fold Error"
The job was canceled because
you specified invalid settings for
saddle stitching or half fold.
Check the settings for saddle
stitching or half fold.
"Classification Code is
incorrect."
The classification code has not
been entered, or the
classification code has been
entered incorrectly.
Enter the correct classification
code.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
Message
Cause
"Classification Code is
incorrect."
The classification code is not
supported with the printer
driver.
"Duplex Cancelled"
Duplex printing was canceled.
Solution
Select [Optional] for
classification code. For details
about how to specify
classification code settings, see
"Configuring Classification
Codes", Print.
• Select an appropriate
paper size for the duplex
function. For details about
paper, see "Specifications
for the Main Unit",
Maintenance and
Specifications.
• Change the setting for
"Apply Duplex" in [Tray
Paper Settings] to enable
duplex printing for the
paper tray. For details
about setting "Apply
Duplex", see "Tray Paper
Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
"Exceeded Max. Pages
(Collate)"
The number of pages exceeds
the maximum number of sheets
that you can use Collate with.
Reduce the number of pages to
print.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of multi-sheet fold (Half
Fold)."
The maximum number of multisheet folds (Half Fold) was
exceeded.
For details about the maximum
number of multi-sheet folds (Half
Fold), see "Fold", Print.
"Output Tray Changed"
The output tray was changed
because the paper size of the
specified output tray is limited.
Specify the proper output tray.
"Print Overrun"
Images were discarded while
printing.
Select a lower resolution on the
printer driver. For details about
how to change the resolution
setting, see the printer driver
Help.
217
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Punch Cancelled"
Punch printing was canceled.
Check the paper orientation,
print orientation, and then
punch position. Certain settings
can produce print results that
might not be as expected.
"Staple Cancelled"
Stapling printing was canceled.
Check the paper orientation,
paper quantity, print
orientation, and staple position.
Certain settings can produce
print results that might not be as
expected.
When documents cannot be stored in the Document Server
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot store data of this
size."
The paper size exceeded
the capacity of the
Document Server.
Reduce the paper size of the file that
you want to send to a size that the
Document Server can store. Custom
size files can be sent but not stored
afterward.
"Document Server is not
available to use. Cannot
store."
You cannot use the
Document Server function.
For details about using Document
Server function, contact your
administrator.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
218
"Exceeded max. capacity of
Document Server. Cannot
store."
The hard disk became full
after a file was stored.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the size
that you want to send.
"Exceeded max. number of
files of Document Server.
Cannot store."
The maximum file capacity
of the Document Server was
exceeded.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded max. number of
files. (Auto)"
While you were using the
Delete Hold Print files (automatic) or
error job store function to
unneeded files stored on the machine.
store Normal Print jobs as
Hold Print files, the maximum
file capacity for file storage
or Hold Print file
management (automatic)
was exceeded.
"Exceeded max. number of
pages of Document Server.
Cannot store."
The maximum page
capacity of the Document
Server was exceeded.
"Exceeded max. number of
pages. (Auto)"
While you were using the
Delete unneeded files stored on the
error job store function to
machine.
store Normal Print jobs as
Reduce the number of pages to print.
Hold Print files, the maximum
page capacity was
exceeded.
"Job cancelled because
capture file could not be
stored: Exceeded max.
memory."
The hard disk became full
after a file was stored.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the number
of pages that you want to send.
Delete the files stored in the Document
Server or reduce the file size to be sent.
"Job cancelled because
The maximum file capacity
capture file could not be
of the Document Server was
stored: Exceeded max. files." exceeded.
Delete the files stored in the Document
Server.
"Job cancelled because
capture file could not be
stored: Exceeded max
pages per file."
The maximum page
capacity of the Document
Server was exceeded.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the number
of pages that you want to send.
"The specified folder in
Document Server is locked.
Cannot store."
The specified folder is
locked.
Unlock the folder or specify another
folder number that can be used. For
details about locked folders, see
Security Guide.
219
10. Troubleshooting
When there is not enough free hard disk space
Message
Cause
Solution
"HDD Full"
When you were printing
with the PostScript 3 printer
driver, the hard disk
capacity for fonts and forms
was exceeded.
Delete unneeded forms or fonts
registered on the machine.
"HDD Full"
The hard disk became full
while you were printing a
Sample Print, Locked Print,
Hold Print, or Stored Print
file.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
The hard disk became full
while you were using the
error job store function to
store Normal Print jobs as
Hold Print files.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
"HDD is full. (Auto)"
Alternatively, reduce the data size of
the Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file.
Alternatively, reduce the data size of
the Temporary Print file and/or the
Stored Print file.
When there is not enough memory
Message
"84: Error"
Cause
There is no work area
available for image
processing.
Solution
Decrease the number of files sent to the
machine.
When there is a problem with a parameter
Message
"86: Error"
220
Cause
Parameters of the control
code are invalid.
Solution
Check the print settings.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation
Message
Cause
Solution
"No response from the
server. Authentication has
failed."
A timeout occurred while
connection to the server was
being established for LDAP
authentication or Windows
Authentication.
Check the status of the server.
"Printing privileges have not
been set for this document."
You have no privileges to
print the PDF document you
tried to print.
Contact the owner of the document.
"You do not have a privilege
to use this function. This job
has been cancelled."
The entered login user name
or login password is not
correct.
Check that the user name and
password are correct.
"You do not have a privilege
to use this function. This job
has been cancelled."
The logged in user is not
allowed to use the selected
function.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
"You do not have a privilege
to use this function. This
operation has been
cancelled."
The logged in user does not
have the privileges to
register programs or change
the paper tray settings.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
When a user cannot be registered
Message
"Auto-registration of user
information has failed."
Cause
Solution
Automatic registration of
For details about automatic registration
information for LDAP
of user information, see Security
Authentication or Windows
Guide.
Authentication failed
because the Address Book is
full.
221
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
"Information for user
authentication is already
registered for another user."
The user name for LDAP or
Integration Server
authentication was already
registered in a different
server with a different ID,
and a duplication of the user
name occurred due to a
switching of domains
(servers), and so on.
Solution
For details about user authentication,
see Security Guide.
When other errors occur
Message
Cause
Solution
"85: Error"
The specified graphics
library is unavailable.
Check that the data is valid.
"98: Error"
The machine could not
access the hard disk
correctly.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
frequently, contact your service
representative.
"99: Error"
This data cannot be printed.
The specified data is either
corrupt or it cannot be
printed from a memory
storage device using the
Direct printing function.
Check that the data is valid. For details
about the kinds of data that can be
printed from a memory storage device
using the Direct printing function, see
"Direct Printing from a Memory
Storage Device", Print.
"Command Error"
An RPCS command error
occurred.
Check using the following procedure:
• Check if the communication
between the computer and the
machine is working correctly.
• Check if the correct printer driver
is being used.
• Check if the machine's memory
size is set correctly in the printer
driver.
• Check that the printer driver is the
most up-to-date version available.
222
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
Message
"Compressed Data Error."
Cause
Solution
The printer detected corrupt
compressed data.
• Check the connection between
the computer and the printer.
• Check that the program you used
to compress the data is
functioning correctly.
"Data Storage Error"
You tried to print a Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, or
to store a file in the
Document Server when the
hard disk was
malfunctioning.
Contact your service representative.
"Error has occurred."
A syntax error, etc.,
occurred.
Check that the PDF file is valid.
"Exceeded Max. Stored
Files"
While printing a Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, the
maximum file capacity was
exceeded.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
"Exceeded Max. Stored
Pages"
While printing a Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, the
maximum page capacity
was exceeded.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
Reduce the number of pages to print.
"Failed to obtain file system." PDF direct printing could not
be performed because the
file system could not be
obtained.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.
"File system is full."
Delete all unnecessary files from the
hard disk, or decrease the file size sent
to the machine.
PDF file does not print out
because the capacity of the
file system is full.
223
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"I/O buffer overflow."
Cause
An input buffer overflow
occurred.
Solution
• In [Printer Features], under [Host
Interface], select [I/O Buffer],
and then set the maximum buffer
size to a larger value.
• Reduce the number of files being
sent to the machine.
"Insufficient Memory"
"Memory Retrieval Error"
A memory allocation error
occurred.
PCL 6
A memory allocation error
occurred.
Turn off the power and then back on
again. If the message appears again,
replace the RAM. For details about
replacing the RAM, contact your
service representative.
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list. In some
cases, it will take a long time to
complete a print job.
If printing does not start, contact your service representative.
• The contents of errors may be printed on the Configuration Page. Check the Configuration Page in
conjunction with the error log. For details about how to print the Configuration Page, see "List / Test
Print", Print.
224
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Messages Displayed When You Use the
Scanner Function
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Scanner Function
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel. If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Message
Cause
"Cannot find the specified
path. Please check the
settings."
The destination computer
name or folder name is
invalid.
"Cannot find the specified
path. Please check the
settings."
An antivirus program or a
firewall is preventing the
machine from connecting to
your computer.
Solution
Check whether the computer name and
the folder name for the destination are
correct.
• Antivirus programs and firewalls
can prevent client computers from
establishing connection with this
machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.
"Entered user code is not
correct. Please re-enter."
You have entered an
incorrect user code.
Check the authentication settings, and
then enter a correct user code.
225
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
"Exceeded max. number of
alphanumeric characters for
the path."
The maximum number of
specifiable alphanumeric
characters in a path has
been exceeded.
Check the maximum number of
characters which can be entered, and
then enter it again. For details about
the maximum enterable number of
characters, see "Values of Various Set
Items for Transmission/Storage
Function", Scan.
"Exceeded max. number of
alphanumeric characters."
The maximum enterable
number of alphanumeric
characters has been
exceeded.
Check the maximum number of
characters which can be entered, and
then enter it again. For details about
the maximum enterable number of
characters, see "Values of Various Set
Items for Transmission/Storage
Function", Scan.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of OCR jobs that
can be on standby for
storing, please wait. Try
again after storing of the
current job has completed."
The maximum allowable
number of jobs on standby
was exceeded because
large quantities of
documents were stored by
the OCR function.
Up to 100 jobs can be placed on
standby by the OCR function. Scan the
next document after the current jobs
have finished being stored.
"File types have been
automatically set for some
files because multiple files
were selected."
If there are selected stored
documents which cannot be
converted to a specified file
format, those documents are
automatically converted to a
convertible format before
they are transmitted.
For details about the file formats used
to transmit stored documents, see
"Sending a Stored File", Scan.
"Programmed. Cannot
program the destination(s)
that is not programmed in
the address book."
The destinations that were
selected while registered to
the program contain a folder
destination for which one of
the following destinations is
set:
WSD destinations and DSM
destinations cannot be registered to the
program because they cannot be
registered in the address book. For
manually entered destinations, register
the destinations in the address book,
and then try to register them to the
program again.
manually entered
destination, WSD
destination, or DSM
destination
226
Solution
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Message
"Scanner journal is full.
Please check Scanner
Features."
Cause
"Print & Delete Scanner
Journal" in [Scanner
Features] is set to [Do not
Print: Disable Send], and
Scanner Journal is full.
Solution
Print or delete Scanner Journal. For
details about Scanner Features, see
"General Settings", Scan.
"The entered file name
The file name contains a
contains invalid character(s). character that cannot be
Enter the file name again
used.
using any of the following 1
byte characters. "0 to 9", "A
to Z", "a to z", ". - _""
Check the file name set at the time of
scanning. For details about characters
that can be used in file names, see
"Specifying the File Name", Scan.
"The entered file name
The file name contains a
contains invalid character(s). character that cannot be
Enter the file name again
used.
using any of the following 1
byte characters. "0 to 9", "A
to Z", "a to z", ". - _""
Check the file name specified at the
time of scanning. The file name
specified in the Sending Scan Files to
Folders function cannot contain the
following characters:
\/:*?"<>|
The file name cannot start or end with a
period ".".
"The program is recalled.
Cannot recall the
destination(s) for which
access privileges are
required."
The currently logged-in user
does not have permission to
view the destination that was
registered in the program.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
"The program is recalled.
Cannot recall the
destination(s) that is deleted
from the address book."
The destination stored in the
program could not be
recalled because it was
deleted from the address
book.
Enter the destination directly to send
data separately.
"The program is recalled.
Cannot recall the folder
destination(s) with protection
code(s)."
The folder destinations for
which the protection code
was set were registered in
the program.
A destination for which the protection
code is set cannot be recalled by the
program. Cancel the protection code
setting or send scanned files to the
destination separately.
227
10. Troubleshooting
When documents cannot be scanned properly
Message
Cause
"All the pages are detected
as blank. No file was
created."
No PDF file was created
because all the pages of the
scanned original were
detected as blank when
[On] is specified for [Delete
Blank Page] in [OCR
Settings].
"Check original's
orientation."
Originals may sometimes not Change the orientation of the original,
be scanned depending on a and then scan the original again.
combination of items such as
the specified scaling factor
and document size.
"Exceeded max. data
capacity."
The scanned data exceeded
maximum data capacity.
Specify the scan size and resolution
again. Note that it may not be possible
to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. For details about the settings
for the scanner function, see
"Relationship between Resolution and
Scan Size", Scan.
The scanned original
exceeded maximum data
capacity.
Specify the scan size and resolution
again. Note that it may not be possible
to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. For details about the settings
for the scanner function, see
"Relationship between Resolution and
Scan Size", Scan.
The data being scanned is
too large for the scale ratio
specified in [Specify Size].
Reduce the resolution or [Specify Size]
value, and then scan the original
again.
"Check scanning resolution,
then press Start key again."
"Exceeded max. data
capacity."
"Check the scanning
resolution, then reset n
original(s)."
("n" in the message
represents a variable.)
"Exceeded max. data
capacity."
"Check the resolution and
the ratio and then press the
Start key again."
228
Solution
Check whether the original is set
upside down.
Change [OCR Scanned PDF: Blank
Page Sensitivity] in [Scanner Features]
to "Sensitivity Level 1".
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded max. number of
files which can be used in
Document Server at the
same time."
The maximum number of
files that can be stored in the
Document Server has been
exceeded.
Check the files stored by the other
functions, and then delete unneeded
files. For details about how to delete
files, see "Deleting Stored Documents",
Copy/ Document Server.
"Not all of the image will be
scanned."
If the scaling factor specified
in "Specify Reproduction
Ratio" is too large, part of
the image may be lost.
Reduce the scaling factor in "Specify
Reproduction Ratio", and then try to
scan the original again.
Using "Specify Reproduction
Ratio" to scale down a large
document may cause part of
the image to be lost.
Specify a large size in [Specify Size],
and then scan the original again.
The data being scanned is
too small for the scale ratio
specified in [Specify Size].
Specify a higher resolution or a large
size in [Specify Size], and then scan
the original again.
"Not all of the image will be
scanned."
"The size of the scanned
data is too small."
"Check the resolution and
the ratio and then press the
Start key again."
If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press the [Start] key to start
scanning with the current scaling
factor.
If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press the [Start] key to start
scanning with the current scaling
factor.
229
10. Troubleshooting
When documents cannot be scanned because the memory is full
Message
"Memory is full. Cannot
scan. The scanned data will
be deleted."
Cause
Because of insufficient hard
disk space, the first page
could not be scanned.
Solution
Try one of the following measures:
• Wait for a while, and then retry
the scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. For details about
changing scan area and scanning
resolution, see "Scan Settings" of
Various Scan Settings, Scan.
• Delete unneeded stored files. For
details about how to delete stored
files, see "Deleting a Stored File",
Scan.
230
"Memory is full. Do you
want to store scanned file?"
Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the data.
free hard disk space in the
machine for storing in the
Document Server, only some
of the pages could be
scanned.
"Memory is full. Scanning
has been cancelled. Press
[Send] to send the scanned
data, or press [Cancel] to
delete."
Because there is not enough
free hard disk space in the
machine for sending by email while data is being
stored in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.
Specify whether or not to use the data.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
When data transmission fails
Message
Cause
"Authentication with the
The entered user name or
destination has failed. Check password was invalid.
settings. To check the current
status, press [Scanned Files
Status]."
Solution
• Check that the user name and
password are correct.
• Check that the ID and password
for the destination folder are
correct.
• A password of 128 or more
characters may not be
recognized.
"Exceeded max. email size.
Sending email has been
cancelled. Check [Max.
Email Size] in Scanner
Features."
The file size per page has
reached the maximum email size specified in
[Scanner Features].
Change the scanner features settings
as follows:
"Sending the data has
failed. The data will be
resent later."
A network error has
occurred and a file was not
sent correctly.
"Transmission has failed.
Insufficient memory in the
destination hard disk. To
check the current status,
press [Scanned Files
Status]."
Transmission has failed.
Allocate sufficient space.
There was not enough free
space on the hard disk of the
SMTP server, FTP server, or
client computer at the
destination.
"Transmission has failed. To
check the current status,
press [Scanned Files
Status]."
While a file was being sent,
a network error occurred
and the file could not be sent
correctly.
• Increase the e-mail size limit in
[Max. Email Size].
• Change the [Divide & Send
Email] setting to [Yes (per Page)]
or [Yes (per Max. Size)]. For
details about these settings, see
"Send Settings", Scan.
Wait until sending is retried
automatically after the preset interval. If
sending fails again, contact your
administrator.
If the same message appears again
after scanning again, the cause could
be a mixed network, or network
settings were changed during WSD
scanner transmission. For details about
network error, contact your
administrator.
231
10. Troubleshooting
When data cannot be sent because a currently used file is selected
Message
Cause
Solution
"Selected file is currently in
use. File name cannot be
changed."
You cannot change the
name of a file whose status
is "Waiting...".
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
cleared), and then change the file
name.
"Selected file is currently in
use. Password cannot be
changed."
You cannot change the
password of a file whose
status is "Waiting...".
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
cleared), and then change the
password.
"Selected file is currently in
use. User name cannot be
changed."
You cannot change the
sender's name whose status
is "Waiting...".
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
cleared), and then change the user
name.
"Some of selected files are
currently in use. They could
not be deleted."
You cannot delete a file
which is waiting to be
transmitted ("Waiting..."
status displayed).
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
cleared), and then delete the file.
When data cannot be sent because there are too many documents or pages
Message
232
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded max. number of
pages per file. Do you want
to store the scanned pages
as 1 file?"
The file being stored has
Specify whether to store the data or
exceeded the maximum
not. Scan the pages that were not
number of pages for one file. scanned, and then store them as a new
file. For details about storing files, see
"Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents", Scan.
"Exceeded max. number of
stored files. Cannot send the
scanned data as capturing
files is unavailable."
Too many files are waiting to Try again after they have been sent.
be sent.
"Exceeded max. page
capacity per file. Press
[Send] to send the scanned
data, or press [Cancel] to
delete."
The number of scanned
pages exceeded the
maximum page capacity.
Specify whether to send the data that
has already been scanned.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Message
"Exceeded maximum
number of file to store.
Delete all unnecessary files."
Cause
Solution
Too many files are waiting to Try again after they have been sent.
be sent.
When the WSD scanner function cannot be used
Message
"Cannot communicate with
PC. Contact the
administrator."
Cause
WSD (Device) protocol or
WSD (Scanner) protocol is
disabled.
Solution
For details about how to enable or
disable the WSD protocol, see Security
Guide.
"Cannot start scanning
Scan Profile is not set on the
because communication was client computer.
failed."
Set Scan Profile. For details about how
to do this, see "Creating a New Scan
Profile", Scan.
"Cannot start scanning
The [Take no action] setting
because communication was has been selected on the
failed."
client computer, forcing the
client computer to remain
inactive when it receives
scan data.
Open scanner properties, click the
[Events] tab, and then select [Start this
program] as the computer's response
when it receives scan data. For details,
see your operating system's Help.
"Cannot start scanning.
Check the setting(s) on the
PC."
The Scan Profile might be
incorrectly configured.
Check the Scan Profile configuration.
"Could not send the data
because the PC timed out
before it was sent."
A time out occurred when
WSD Scanner was used.
Time outs occur when too
much time passes between
scanning an original and
sending its data. The
followings are likely causes
of time outs:
• Too many originals per
set.
• Reduce the number of originals,
and then scan again.
• Remove any misfed original, and
then scan again.
• Use Scanner Journal to check
there are no jobs awaiting
transmission, and then scan
again.
• Misfed originals.
• Transmission of other
jobs.
233
10. Troubleshooting
When documents cannot be stored on a memory storage device
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot write on the
memory storage device
because remaining free
space is insufficient."
The memory storage device
is full and scan data cannot
be saved. Even if the
memory storage device
appears to have sufficient
free space, data might not
be saved if the maximum
number of files that can be
saved is exceeded.
• Replace the memory storage
device.
"Cannot write on the
memory storage device
because the device is writeprotected."
The memory storage device
is write-protected.
Unlock the write-protection on the
memory storage device.
"Cannot write on the
memory storage device.
Check the memory storage
device and machine
settings."
The memory storage device
is faulty, or the file name
contains a character that
cannot be used.
• Check to see if the memory
storage device is defective.
• If the document is scanned as
single-page or divided into
multiple pages, data already
written to the memory storage
device is saved as is. Replace the
memory storage device, and then
press [Retry] to save the
remaining data, or press [Cancel]
to redo the scan.
• Check the memory storage
device. It might be unformatted,
or its format might be
incompatible with this machine.
• Check the file name set at the time
of scanning. For details about the
characters that can be used in file
names, see "Specifying the File
Name", Scan.
"Exceeded max. page
capacity per file. Press
[Write] to write the scanned
data to the memory storage
device, or press [Cancel] to
delete."
234
The scan could not be
completed because the
maximum number of pages
that can be scanned by this
machine was exceeded
during the scanned data
was written to the memory
storage device.
Reduce the number of documents to be
written to the memory storage device,
and then try again.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Message
"Memory is full. Press [Write]
to write the current scanned
data to the memory storage
device, or press [Cancel] to
delete."
Cause
The scan could not be
completed because there
was insufficient hard disk
memory when the scanned
data was saved to the
memory storage device.
Solution
Specify whether or not to save the
scanned document to the memory
storage device.
Messages Displayed on the Client Computer
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error messages displayed on
the client computer when you use the TWAIN driver. If a message not described here appears, follow
the instruction.
Message
Cause
Solution
"Any of Login User Name,
Login Password or Driver
Encryption Key is incorrect."
The entered login user
name, password, or driver
encryption key was invalid.
Check your login user name, login
password, or driver encryption key,
and then enter them correctly. For
details about login user name, login
password, and driver encryption key,
see Security Guide.
"Authentication succeeded.
However, the access
privileges for scanner
function has been denied."
The logged in user name
does not have permissions
for scanner function.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
"Cannot add any more
scanning mode."
The maximum number of
registrable scan modes has
been exceeded.
The maximum number of modes that
can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
modes.
235
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
"Cannot detect the paper
size of the original. Specify
the scanning size."
The set original was
misaligned.
"Cannot specify any more
scanning area."
The maximum number of
registrable scan modes has
been exceeded.
"Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF."
A paper misfeed has
occurred inside the ADF.
Solution
• Place the original correctly.
• Specify the scan size.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the exposure
glass cover or the ADF triggers
the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the
exposure glass cover or the ADF
30 degrees or more.
The maximum number of scanning
areas that can be stored is 100. Delete
unneeded scanning areas.
• Remove the jammed originals,
and then insert them again. For
details about jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.
• When a misfeed occurs, replace
the jammed originals.
• Check whether the originals are
suitable to be scanned by the
machine.
"Error has occurred in the
scanner driver."
An error has occurred in the
driver.
• Check whether the network cable
is connected correctly to the client
computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is
recognized correctly by
Windows.
• Check whether the client
computer can use the TCP/IP
protocol.
236
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Message
Cause
Solution
"Error has occurred in the
scanner."
The application-specified
scan conditions have
exceeded the setting range
of the machine.
Check whether the scanning settings
made with the application exceed the
setting range of the machine.
"Fatal error has occurred in
the scanner."
An unrecoverable machine
error has occurred.
An unrecoverable machine error has
occurred. Contact your service
representative.
"Insufficient memory. Close
all other applications, then
restart scanning."
Memory is insufficient.
• Close all the unnecessary
applications running on the client
computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.
"Insufficient memory. Reduce Scanner memory is
the scanning area."
insufficient.
• Reset the scan size.
• Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. For
details about the settings, see
TWAIN driver Help.
The problem may be due to the
following:
• Scanning cannot be performed if
large values are set for brightness
when halftone or high resolution is
used. For details about the
relationship between scan
settings, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Scan.
• If a misfeed occurs, you might not
scan an original. Remove the
misfeed, and then scan the
original again.
"Invalid Winsock version.
Please use version 1.1 or
higher."
You are using an invalid
version of Winsock.
Install the operating system of the
computer or copy Winsock from the
operating system CD-ROM.
237
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"No response from the
scanner."
Cause
Solution
The machine or client
computer is not connected to
the network correctly.
• Check whether the machine or
client computer is connected to
the network correctly.
• Disable the client computer's own
firewall. For details about firewall,
see Windows Help.
"No response from the
scanner."
The network is crowded.
"Scanner is in use for other
function. Please wait."
A function of the machine
other than the Scanner
function is being used such
as the Copier function.
Wait for a while, and then connect to
the network again.
• Wait for a while, and then
connect to the network again.
• Cancel the job that is being
processed. Press the [Stop] key.
Follow the instructions in the
message that appears and exit
the function that is running.
"Scanner is not available on
the specified device."
The TWAIN scanner function Contact your service representative.
cannot be used on this
machine.
"Scanner is not ready.
Check the scanner and the
options."
The ADF cover is open.
Check whether the ADF cover is
closed.
"The name is already in use.
Check the registered
names."
You tried to register a name
that is already in use.
Use another name.
When there is a problem connecting to the scanner
Message
"Cannot connect to the
scanner. Check the network
Access Mask settings in User
Tools."
238
Cause
An access mask is set.
Solution
For details about an access mask,
contact your administrator.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
Message
"Cannot find "XXX" scanner
used for the previous scan.
"YYY" will be used instead."
Cause
Solution
The main power of the
previously used scanner is
not set to "On".
Check whether the main power of the
scanner used for the previous scan is
turned on.
The machine is not
connected to the network
correctly.
• Check that the previously used
scanner is connected to the
network correctly.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)
"Cannot find "XXX" scanner
used for the previous scan.
"YYY" will be used instead."
• Cancel the personal firewall of
the client computer. For details
about firewall, see Windows
Help.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• Select the scanner used for the
previous scan.
"Communication error has
occurred on the network."
A communication error has
occurred on the network.
Check whether the client computer can
use the TCP/IP protocol.
"Scanner is not available.
Check the scanner
connection status."
The machine's power is off.
Turn on the power.
239
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Scanner is not available.
Check the scanner
connection status."
Cause
The machine is not
connected to the network
correctly.
Solution
• Check whether the machine is
connected to the network
correctly.
• Cancel the personal firewall
function of the client computer.
For details about firewall, see
Windows Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
"Scanner is not available.
Check the scanner
connection status."
240
Network communication is
not available because the
machine's IP address could
not be obtained from the
host name. If only "IPv6" is
set to [Active], the IPv6
address might not be
obtained.
• Check whether the machine's host
name is specified in the Network
Connection Tool. For the WIA
driver, check the [Network
Connection] tab in the properties.
• Use Web Image Monitor to set
"LLMNR" of "IPv6" to [Active].
• In Windows XP, IPv6 address
cannot be obtained from the host
name. Specify the machine's IPv6
address in the Network
Connection Tool.
When Other Messages Appear
When Other Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot connect with the
wireless card. Turn the main
power switch off, then check
the card."
• The wireless LAN
board was not inserted
when the machine was
turned on.
(A "wireless LAN board" or
"Bluetooth interface unit" is
referred to as a "wireless
card".)
• The wireless LAN
board was pulled out
after the machine was
turned on.
Turn off the power, and then check the
wireless LAN board is inserted
correctly. After this, turn on the power
again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.
• The settings are not
updated although the
unit is detected.
"Cannot connect with the
Bluetooth interface. Check
the Bluetooth interface."
• The Bluetooth interface
unit was installed while
the machine was turned
on.
• The Bluetooth interface
unit was removed while
the machine was turned
on.
Turn off the power, and then confirm
that the Bluetooth interface unit was
installed correctly. After this, turn on the
power again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Clean the scanning glass.
(Located next to the
exposure glass.)"
The scanning glass or guide
plate of the ADF is dirty.
Clean the scanning glass or guide
plate. See "Maintaining Your
Machine", Maintenance and
Specifications.
"Following output tray is full.
Remove paper."
The output tray is full.
Remove paper from the output tray to
resume printing. If paper is delivered to
the finisher shift tray and you want to
prevent paper from falling off the tray,
press the [Stop] key to suspend
printing, and then remove the paper.
Press [Continue] on the display panel
to resume printing.
241
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"Internal cooling fan is
active."
Solution
Large print runs will cause
the machine's interior to heat
up, triggering the cooling
fan.
The fan will emit noise, but this is
normal and the machine will be
operable while the fan is running.
"Self checking..."
The machine is performing
image adjustment
operations.
The machine may perform periodic
maintenance during operations. The
frequency and duration of
maintenance depends on the humidity,
temperature, and printing factors such
as number of prints, paper size, and
paper type. Wait for the machine to
resume operation.
"XXX is not responding."
The machine is busy
processing data.
To continue the current job, press
[Wait]. To stop the current job, press
[Force close].
(This message may appear
while you are using the
Smart Operation Panel.
"XXX" in this message
indicates the function is
being used.)
242
Cause
The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time
until the fan starts running depends on
the temperature of the location at
which the machine is installed.
When Other Messages Appear
When There Is a Problem Scanning or Storing Originals
Message
Cause
"Cannot detect original size.
Select scan size."
The machine failed to detect
the size of the original.
Solution
• Place the original correctly.
• Specify the scan size, and then
place the originals again. For
details about the settings for when
fax function is being used, see
"Scan Settings", Fax.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the exposure
glass cover or the ADF triggers
the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the
exposure glass cover or the ADF
30 degrees or more.
"Captured file exceeded
max. number of pages per
file. Cannot send the
scanned data."
The maximum number of
pages per file has been
exceeded.
Reduce the number of pages in the
transmitted file, and then resend the
file. For details about the maximum
number of pages per file, see "Storage
Function", Scan.
"Original(s) is being
scanned for a different
function."
Another function of the
machine is being used.
Cancel the job in progress. Press [Exit],
and then press the [Stop] key. Follow
the instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that is
running.
When the Home Screen Cannot Be Edited (When Using the Standard
Operation Panel)
Message
"The image data size is not
valid. See the manual for
required data."
Cause
The image data size is not
valid.
Solution
For details about file size for shortcut
image, see "Displaying an Image on
the [Home] Screen (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)",
Convenient Functions.
243
10. Troubleshooting
Message
"The format of the image
data is not valid. See the
manual for required data."
Cause
Solution
The file format of the shortcut
image to be added is not
supported.
The file format of shortcut images to be
added must be PNG. Specify the
image again.
When the Address Book Is Updated
Message
"Updating the destination list
has failed. Try again?"
Cause
A network error has
occurred.
Solution
• Check whether the server is
connected.
• Antivirus programs and firewalls
can prevent client computers from
establishing connection with this
machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.
"Updating the destination
list... Please wait. Specified
destination(s) or sender's
name has been cleared."
244
The destination list is being
updated from the network
using Web Image Monitor.
Wait until the message disappears. Do
not turn off the power while this
message is displayed. Depending on
the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be some delay
before operation is resumed.
Operation is not possible while this
message is displayed.
When Other Messages Appear
Message
"Updating the destination
list... Please wait. Specified
destination(s) or sender's
name has been cleared."
Cause
A specified destination or
sender's name was cleared
when the destination list in
the delivery server was
updated.
Solution
Specify the destination or sender's
name again.
When Data Cannot Be Sent Due to a Problem with the Destination
Message
Cause
Solution
"Some invalid destination(s)
contained. Do you want to
select only valid
destination(s)?"
The specified group contains In the message that appears at each
fax destinations, e-mail
transmission, press [Select].
destinations, and/or folder
destinations, either of which
is incompatible with the
specified transmission
method.
"SMTP authentication email
address and administrator
email address mismatch."
The SMTP authentication email address and the
administrator's e-mail
address do not match.
For details about how to set SMTP
authentication, see "File Transfer",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated Due to a Problem with the User
Certificate
Message
Cause
Solution
"The destination cannot be
selected because its
encryption certificate is not
currently valid."
The user certificate
(destination certificate) has
expired.
A new user certificate must be installed.
For details about the user certificate
(destination certificate), see Security
Guide.
"The group destination
cannot be selected because
it contains a destination with
a encryption certificate that
is not currently valid."
The user certificate
(destination certificate) has
expired.
A new user certificate must be installed.
For details about the user certificate
(destination certificate), see Security
Guide.
245
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Transmission cannot be
performed because the
encryption certificate is not
currently valid."
The user certificate
(destination certificate) has
expired.
A new user certificate must be installed.
For details about the user certificate
(destination certificate), see Security
Guide.
"XXX cannot be YYY
because the device
certificate used for the S/
MIME signature is not
currently valid."
The device certificate (S/
MIME) has expired.
A new device certificate (S/MIME)
must be installed. For details about
how to install a device certificate (S/
MIME), see Security Guide.
There is no device certificate
(S/MIME), or the certificate
is invalid.
For details about the device certificate
(S/MIME), see Security Guide.
The device certificate (PDF
with digital signature or
PDF/A with digital
signature) has expired.
A new device certificate (PDF with
digital signature or PDF/A with digital
signature) must be installed. For details
about how to install a device certificate
(PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
with digital signature), see Security
Guide.
There is no device certificate
(PDF with digital signature or
PDF/A with digital
signature), or the certificate
is invalid.
A new device certificate (PDF with
digital signature or PDF/A with digital
signature) must be installed. For details
about how to install a device certificate
(PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
with digital signature), see Security
Guide.
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
"XXX cannot be YYY
because there is a problem
with the device certificate
used for the S/MIME
signature. Check the device
certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
"XXX cannot be YYY
because the Digital
Signature's device certificate
is not currently valid."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
"XXX cannot be YYY
because there is a problem
with the Digital Signature's
device certificate. Check the
device certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
246
When Other Messages Appear
• If a fax or an e-mail cannot be sent and a message appears which states that there is a problem
with the device certificate or user certificate, a new certificate must be installed. For details about
how to install a new certificate, see Security Guide.
When Problems Occur While Logging In
Message
Cause
Solution
"Authentication has failed."
The entered login user name
or login password is not
correct.
For details about the correct login user
name and login password, see
Security Guide.
"Authentication has failed."
The machine cannot perform
authentication.
For details about authentication, see
Security Guide.
When the User Lacks Privileges to Perform an Operation
Message
Cause
Solution
"You do not have the
privileges to use this
function."
The logged in user name
does not have permissions
for the selected function.
For details about how to set
permissions, see Security Guide.
"The selected file(s)
contained file(s) without
access privileges. Only
file(s) with access privileges
will be deleted."
You have tried to delete files
without the permission to do
so.
To check your access permission for
stored documents, or to delete a
document you do not have permission
to delete, see Security Guide.
247
10. Troubleshooting
When the LDAP Server Cannot Be Used
Message
"Connection with LDAP
server has failed. Check the
server status."
Cause
A network error has
occurred and connection
has failed.
Solution
Try the operation again. If the message
is still displayed, the network may be
busy.
Check the settings for LDAP server in
[System Settings]. For details about
settings for LDAP server, see
"Programming the LDAP server",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
"Exceeded time limit for
LDAP server search. Check
the server status."
A network error has
occurred and connection
has failed.
• Try the operation again. If the
message is still displayed, the
network may be busy.
• Check that the correct settings for
LDAP server are listed in
[Administrator Tools] of [System
Settings]. For details about LDAP
server, see "Programming the
LDAP server", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
"LDAP server authentication
has failed. Check the
settings."
248
A network error has
occurred and connection
has failed.
Configure settings correctly for the user
name and the password for LDAP
server authentication.
11. Information for This Machine
This chapter describes environmental precautions and regulations.
Information on Environmental Regulations
ENERGY STAR Program
ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment
This company is a participant in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
This machine is compliant with the regulations specified by the
ENERGY STAR® Program.
The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multi-function
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.
• For details about the "default delay time", see page 249 "Energy Saving Functions".
Energy Saving Functions
To reduce its power consumption, this machine has the following functions:
Sleep mode
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period or when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed, it
enters Sleep mode to further reduce its electrical consumption.
249
11. Information for This Machine
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Sleep mode is 1 minute. This default
time can be changed.
• The machine can print jobs from computers and receive faxes while in Sleep mode.
Specification
• When using a model with the standard operation panel
(mainly Europe)
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6
Reduced
electrical
consumption in
Sleep mode *1
0.49 W
0.46 W
0.49 W
0.51 W
0.51 W
0.51 W
Time of switch
into Sleep mode
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
Time of switch
out from Sleep
mode *1
4.9
seconds
4.9
seconds
5.1
seconds
5.1
seconds
5.6
seconds
5.6
seconds
Duplex Function
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
*4
*2
0.49 W
*3
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 When using a model equipped with copy functions as standard.
*3 When using a model equipped with scanner and printer functions as standard.
*4 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
• When using a model with the Smart Operation Panel
250
(mainly Europe)
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6
Reduced
electrical
consumption in
Sleep mode *1
0.72 W
0.72 W
0.72 W
0.76 W
0.75 W
0.76 W
Time of switch
into Sleep mode
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
Information on Environmental Regulations
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6
Time of switch
out from Sleep
mode *1
6.2
seconds
6.2
seconds
6.2
seconds
6.3
seconds
6.3
seconds
6.3
seconds
Duplex Function
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
*2
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
(mainly Asia)
•
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6
Reduced
electrical
consumption in
Sleep mode *1
0.49 W
0.46 W
0.46 W
0.48 W
0.48 W
0.48 W
Time of switch
into Sleep mode
*2
0.49 W
*2
0.49 W
*2
0.51 W
*2
0.51 W
*2
0.51 W
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
Time of switch
out from Sleep
mode *1
4.9
seconds
4.9
seconds
5.1
seconds
5.1
seconds
5.6
seconds
5.6
seconds
Duplex Function
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
*4
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 When using a model equipped with copy functions as standard.
*3 When using a model equipped with scanner and printer functions as standard.
*4 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
•
(mainly North America)
251
11. Information for This Machine
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6
Reduced
electrical
consumption in
Sleep mode *1
0.47 W
0.47 W
0.47 W
0.45 W
0.45 W
0.45 W
Time of switch
into Sleep mode
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
Time of switch
out from Sleep
mode *1
4.7
seconds
4.7
seconds
4.7
seconds
4.9
seconds
4.9
seconds
4.9
seconds
Duplex Function
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
*2
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
• Specifications can vary depending on which options are installed on the machine.
• For details about how to change the default interval, see "Timer Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Depending on which embedded software application is installed on it, the machine might take
longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Europe)
(mainly
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.
252
Information on Environmental Regulations
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
All Other Users
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
(mainly Europe)
In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
253
11. Information for This Machine
Environmental Advice for Users
(mainly Europe)
Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway
Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.
https://www.ricoh-return.com/
Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.
Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.
254
Information on Environmental Regulations
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)
(mainly North America)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
255
11. Information for This Machine
256
INDEX
D
2 Sided Print...........................................................11
A
Adding toner........................................................183
Address Book... 13, 110, 111, 136, 138, 139, 140,
143, 145, 244
ADF................................................. 9, 27, 31, 34, 85
ADF's extender......................................... 29, 32, 35
ARDF............................................................ 9, 39, 45
Authentication screen............................................ 80
Auto Document Feeder........................................... 9
Auto Reduce / Enlarge.................................. 16, 89
Auto Reverse Document Feeder............................. 9
B
Basic procedure 87, 107, 125, 133, 142, 147, 153
Beeping pattern................................................... 190
Booklet................................................................... 16
Booklet Finisher SR3150..... 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48,
50, 52, 54
Booklet Finisher SR3170...... 44, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55
Bridge unit.......... 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54
Bypass tray.... 29, 32, 35, 100, 101, 160, 162, 172
C
Canceling a transmission........................... 116, 117
Caster table for lower paper tray.... 38, 39, 41, 43,
45, 48, 50, 52, 54
Changing the display language.......................... 61
Changing the number of sets..............................104
Check Status key.................................... 58, 60, 188
Checking a stored file......................................... 148
Clear key................................................................ 57
Combine.................................................... 11, 16, 95
Combine printing.................................................127
Communicating indicator......................................58
Computer............................................................. 235
Confidential File indicator..................................... 58
Control panel............................... 28, 31, 34, 56, 59
Copier............................................................ 87, 197
Copy orientation....................................................93
Creating a shared folder.................................... 134
Custom size paper......................................100, 163
Data In indicator............................................. 58, 60
Data security for copying......................................25
Destination........................................................... 245
Direct print........................................................... 214
Display panel......................................................... 56
Distributed scan management.............................. 24
Document Server.........12, 17, 106, 131, 132, 153,
155, 197, 218
DSM....................................................................... 24
Duplex....................................................... 11, 16, 91
E
E-mail address................................... 143, 145, 146
E-mail destination...............................143, 145, 146
E-mail transmission................................................ 20
Embedding text information..................................22
Energy Saver key.................................................. 57
ENERGY STAR Program..................................... 249
Enter key................................................................. 57
Envelope............ 16, 101, 102, 129, 130, 172, 179
Environmental advice for users.......................... 254
Error log............................................................... 214
Error report.......................................................... 214
Exposure glass........... 27, 31, 34, 83, 84, 109, 114
Exposure glass cover............................... 31, 39, 45
Extender.................................................... 29, 33, 36
External options. 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53
External tray....... 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54
F
Facsimile...................................................... 107, 201
Fax destination............................................110, 111
Fax indicator.......................................................... 60
Fax Received indicator......................................... 58
File type................................................................ 150
Finisher SR3140 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54
Finisher SR3160................... 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54
Folder destination............. 136, 138, 139, 140, 141
Frequently-used settings........................................ 14
Front cover................................................ 28, 31, 34
Function Compatibility........................................ 195
Function keys......................................................... 56
257
H
M
Handset..................................................... 41, 47, 53
Hold Print................................................................17
Home key........................................................ 56, 59
Home screen..............................15, 62, 68, 69, 243
How to Read the Manuals...................................... 7
Magazine.............................................................. 16
Mail to Print............................................................ 20
Main power indicator.....................................57, 59
Main power switch............................ 28, 31, 34, 79
Managing documents......................................... 132
Media access lamp........................................ 58, 60
Media slots...................................................... 58, 60
Memory....................................................... 220, 230
Memory storage device.............................214, 234
Memory Transmission................................ 107, 109
Menu key............................................................... 60
Message......... 191, 197, 201, 202, 208, 211, 214,
I
Icon........................................ 62, 63, 64, 69, 70, 71
Immediate Transmission............................. 113, 114
Indicator lamp..................................................... 188
Information on environmental regulations.........249
Information screen................................................. 11
Internal Finisher SR3130...... 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48
Internal Finisher SR3180......................... 38, 40, 42
Internal shift tray 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54
Internal tray 1........................................... 28, 31, 34
Internal tray 2.... 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54
Internet Fax............................................................ 20
Interrupt key........................................................... 57
IP-Fax......................................................................20
N
Journal.................................................................. 122
Names of major features........................................ 9
Network setting................................................... 202
Note for the battery and/or accumulator symbol..
.............................................................................. 253
Notes to users in the state of California.............255
Number keys..........................................................57
L
O
Label paper......................................................... 172
LAN-Fax...........................................................11, 18
Large capacity tray....... 38, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 50,
OCR unit................................................................. 22
OHP transparencies.............................16, 165, 172
One-pass duplex scanning ADF.......................... 45
One-sided combine.............................................. 96
Options................................................................... 37
Orientation-fixed paper......................................169
Original orientation........................................ 91, 93
J
52, 54, 168, 172
Large Capacity Tray................................................ 9
LCT 9, 38, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 168, 172
LDAP server..........................................................248
Loading paper.................. 159, 160, 166, 168, 169
Locked Print............................................................ 17
Logging in the machine.......................... 80, 81, 247
Logging out the machine.......................................82
Login/Logout key.................................................. 57
Lower paper tray.... 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 48, 49, 51,
54
Lower paper trays... 28, 32, 35, 38, 40, 42, 43, 46,
48, 50, 52, 54
Lower right cover...................................... 30, 33, 36
258
215, 216, 218, 220, 221, 222, 225, 228, 230,
231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 238, 241, 243, 244,
245, 247, 248
Model-specific information..................................... 8
P
Paper capacity.................................................... 172
Paper guides............................................. 29, 32, 35
Paper size....................................................162, 172
Paper thickness.................................................... 172
Paper trays...............................28, 32, 35, 159, 172
Paper type............................................................172
Paper weight........................................................172
Paperless Fax......................................................... 11
PCL 6................................. 123, 125, 126, 127, 130
Placing originals....................................... 83, 84, 85
Preventing information leakage........................... 23
Printer..... 125, 211, 214, 215, 216, 218, 220, 221,
222
Printer Bypass Paper Size.......................... 162, 163
Printer driver properties...................................... 124
Privilege................................................................247
Problem....................................................... 191, 243
Program..................................................... 14, 73, 76
Program key........................................................... 57
Punch...................................................................... 16
Q
Quick Install......................................................... 123
R
Recommended paper......................................... 172
Reducing my costs................................................. 11
Region A................................................................... 8
Region B................................................................... 8
Registering destinations.........................................13
Remote Fax....................................................21, 208
Reset key................................................................ 56
Return key...............................................................60
Right cover................................................ 30, 33, 36
Running out of toner............................................ 184
S
Sample Copy key.................................................. 57
Sample Print........................................................... 17
Scan Settings....................................................... 151
Scan to E-mail......................................................142
Scan to Folder............................................... 22, 133
Scanner.. 133, 142, 147, 225, 228, 230, 231, 232,
234, 235, 238
Sending originals........................................109, 114
Sending scan files........................................... 12, 22
Sending stored documents................................. 120
Shared folder.......................................................134
Shortcut icon.......................... 62, 63, 64, 69, 70, 71
Simple Screen key................................................. 57
Sleep mode......................................................... 249
Smart Operation Panel......... 39, 41, 45, 47, 51, 53
SMB folder................................ 136, 138, 139, 140
Sort........................................................ 16, 103, 104
Stamps.................................................................... 16
Standard printing................................................ 125
Staple............................................................... 16, 17
Start key................................................................. 57
Status icon............................................................ 187
Stop key........................................................... 57, 59
Stored documents................................ 17, 120, 155
Stored Print............................................................. 17
Storing a document............................................. 119
Storing data................................................ 106, 153
Storing documents...............................................131
Storing received documents................................. 18
Storing scan files........................................... 12, 147
Symbols.................................................................... 7
T
Thick paper................................................. 165, 178
Thin paper............................................................ 165
Toner................................................... 183, 184, 185
Translucent paper................................................172
Tray 1............................................... 28, 32, 35, 172
Tray 2............................................... 28, 32, 35, 172
Tray 3................................................................... 172
Tray 3 (LCT)...... 38, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54,
166, 172
Tray 4................................................................... 172
Turning off the power............................................ 79
Turning on the power............................................ 79
Two-sided combine............................................... 97
Two-sided paper................................................. 169
Two-sided printing.............................................. 126
U
Unauthorized copy prevention............................ 25
Used toner........................................................... 185
User certificate..................................................... 245
User Code Authentication.....................................80
User information on electrical and electronic
equipment............................................................ 252
User Tools/Counter key....................................... 57
Using scanned files on the computer................... 12
V
Vents................................ 28, 29, 30, 31, 33, 34, 36
259
W
Web Image Monitor.................................... 24, 157
Widget................................................................... 72
WSD scanner................................................ 22, 233
260
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
D202-7482
© 2014
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
D202-7482
Operating Instructions
Driver Installation Guide
For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in "Read This First" before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction
Start Installer........................................................................................................................................................3
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM.............................................................................................5
Printer Drivers..................................................................................................................................................5
TWAIN Driver.................................................................................................................................................7
LAN-Fax Driver...............................................................................................................................................8
For Mac OS X Users...........................................................................................................................................9
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Confirming the Connection Method............................................................................................................... 11
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 11
Local Connection......................................................................................................................................... 12
Quick Install...................................................................................................................................................... 14
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection..................................................................................16
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port........................................................................................16
Using as a Network Printer......................................................................................................................... 25
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection....................................................................................... 29
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................29
Parallel Connection..................................................................................................................................... 32
Bluetooth Connection.................................................................................................................................. 33
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer.................................................................................................... 39
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication............................................................................................. 39
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled............................................................................................... 40
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
Installing the TWAIN Driver............................................................................................................................ 43
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver.......................................................................................................................... 45
Specifying the Same Port as the Printer Driver...........................................................................................45
Specifying the Port When Installing the LAN-Fax Driver.......................................................................... 46
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.................................................................................................................. 48
Setting Print Properties................................................................................................................................. 48
Configuring Option Settings for the Facsimile........................................................................................... 49
5. Troubleshooting
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver............................................................................... 51
1
If USB Connection Fails................................................................................................................................... 53
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under Mac OS X
Installing the PPD Files......................................................................................................................................55
Registering the Printer.......................................................................................................................................56
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................56
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 57
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer Under Mac OS X......................................................................58
7. Appendix
Updating or Deleting the Driver......................................................................................................................59
Updating the Driver..................................................................................................................................... 59
Deleting the Driver....................................................................................................................................... 60
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 63
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................. 65
2
1. Introduction
This chapter explains the software included on the supplied CD-ROM.
Start Installer
To connect this machine to a client computer and use its printer, scanner, and fax functions, the software
included on the provided CD-ROM must be installed on the client computer.
The installer starts automatically when you insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of a
client computer running under Windows or Windows Server. You can then install the various software
included on the CD-ROM.
The contents (display item) of the installer are as follows:
Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver, and configures the Standard TCP/IP port to establish a connection
with a network printer.
For details, see page 14 "Quick Install".
PCL Printer Driver
Installs the PCL 6 and/or PCL 5e printer drivers.
For details about installing the driver, see page 16 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 29 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Installs the PostScript 3 printer driver.
For details about installing the driver, see page 16 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 29 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
LAN-Fax Driver
This software enables you to fax documents directly from your computer. Address Book and LANFax Cover Sheet Editor will also be installed.
For details about installing the driver, see page 45 "Installing the LAN-Fax Driver".
TWAIN Driver
This software enables you to utilize image data from other TWAIN compliant applications.
For details about installing the driver, see page 43 "Installing the TWAIN Driver".
Select Language
Changes the interface language.
Browse This CD-ROM
Browses the contents of this CD-ROM.
3
1. Introduction
Exit
Quits Installer.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
"Setup.exe", located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.
• If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the left [Shift] key while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep
the [Shift] key held down until the computer stops reading the CD-ROM.
4
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
This section explains the software and utilities CD-ROM provided with this machine.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see "Readme.txt" file, located on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• For the latest information on Windows Terminal Service, Citrix Presentation Server, and Citrix
XenApp, see the manufacturer's Web site.
Printer Drivers
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are
included on the CD-ROM.
Printer Language
Operating System*1
PCL 5e
PCL 6
PostScript 3
Windows XP *2
OK
OK
OK
Windows Vista *3
OK
OK
OK
Windows 7 *4
OK
OK
OK
Windows 8 *5
OK
OK
OK
Windows 8.1 *6
OK
OK
OK
Windows Server 2003 *7
OK
OK
OK
Windows Server 2008 *8
OK
OK
OK
Windows Server 2012 *9
OK
OK
OK
Mac OS X *10
OK
*1 Windows operating system supports both versions (32/64 bit)
*2 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition/Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
*3 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista Business/
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*4 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate/
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
*5 Microsoft Windows 8/Microsoft Windows 8 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise
5
1. Introduction
*6 Microsoft Windows 8.1/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition/
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise
Edition
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
*9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation/Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 R2 Essentials/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard
*10 Mac OS X 10.6 or later
PCL printer drivers
Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included. These drivers allow your
computer to communicate with this machine via a printer language.
Adobe® PostScript® printer driver and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer
language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In this case, you can install
PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
• For details about installing the driver, see page 16 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 29 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
Supported languages
The languages supported in each printer driver are as follow:
Printer Language
Supported languages
English
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Swedish
6
PCL 5e *1
PCL 6 *2
PostScript 3 *2
PPD (Mac OS X)
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Printer Language
Supported languages
PCL 5e *1
PCL 6 *2
PostScript 3 *2
PPD (Mac OS X)
Norwegian
Danish
Finnish
Hungarian
Czech
Polish
Portuguese
Russian
Catalan
Turkish
Brazilian Portuguese
Greek
: Supported
: Supported, but the printer language is displayed in English
*1 The PCL 5e printer driver does not support Brazilian Portuguese and Greek. Use the English version of the
driver.
*2 The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers use the same interface language as the one specified by your
operating system. However, the PostScript 3 printer will be displayed in English if your operating system uses
one of the following languages: Finnish, Hungarian, Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Catalan, Turkish,
Brazilian Portuguese, Greek.
TWAIN Driver
This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine as a network TWAIN
scanner, this driver must be installed.
File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
\X86\DRIVERS\TWAIN
7
1. Introduction
Supported Operating System*1
Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
*1 TWAIN scanner runs on a 64-bit operating system, but is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it
with 32-bit applications.
Supported languages
The TWAIN Driver uses the same interface language as the one specified by your operating
system.
• For details about installing the driver, see page 43 "Installing the TWAIN Driver".
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver is required to use LAN-Fax functions.
File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
• 32-bit driver
\X86\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\XP_VISTA
• 64-bit driver
\X64\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\X64
Supported Operating System
Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
Supported languages
The interface language is supported in the language specified when installing driver.
• For details about installing the driver, see page 45 "Installing the LAN-Fax Driver".
8
For Mac OS X Users
For Mac OS X Users
If you are using Mac OS X, the following limitations apply to each function:
• When using the scanner function, the TWAIN Driver cannot be used.
• When using the fax function, the LAN-Fax Driver cannot be used.
• When using the printer function, use the printer driver for Mac OS X.
For details, see page 55 "Installing the Printer Driver Under Mac OS X".
9
1. Introduction
10
2. Installing the Printer Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the Windows operating
system. Installing procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.
Confirming the Connection Method
This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow the driver installation
procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.
Network Connection
This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.
Using the Windows printing port
Network connections can be established through Ethernet and Wireless LAN.
Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and
connection method used.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
Connection Method
Available Ports
• Ethernet
• Standard TCP/IP port
• Wireless LAN
• IPP port
• LPR port
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
Connection Method
Available Ports
• Ethernet
• Standard TCP/IP port
• Wireless LAN
• IPP port
• LPR port
• WSD port
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
11
2. Installing the Printer Driver
• For details about how to install the printer driver for each type of port, see page 16 "Installing the
Printer Driver for the Selected Port".
Using as a network printer
This machine can be used as a remote printer using the Windows or NetWare print server function.
Client OS
Using Server
• Windows XP
• Windows XP print server
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
• Windows Vista print server
• Windows 7 print server
• Windows 8 print server
• Windows 8.1 print server
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 print server
• NetWare print server (using IPv4 only)
• NetWare file server (using IPv4 only)
• Windows Vista
• Windows XP print server
• Windows 7
• Windows Vista print server
• Windows 8
• Windows 7 print server
• Windows 8.1
• Windows 8 print server
• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2
• Windows 8.1 print server
• Windows Server 2012/2012 R2
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 print server
• For details about how to install the printer driver to print server, see page 25 "Using as a
Network Printer".
Local Connection
Local connections can be established via USB, parallel, and Bluetooth connections.
12
Confirming the Connection Method
• For details about how to install the printer driver for each method of connections, see page 29
"Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
13
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
Using Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the Standard
TCP/IP port will be set.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
1. Click [Quick Install] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
7. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.
• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 51 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
14
Quick Install
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
15
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for network connection.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 51 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port
Describes the driver installation procedure for each printer port. See the installation procedure for the
printer port you are using.
• To use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, you must first download SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client from the manufacturer's Web site and install it on your computer. Contact your local dealer
for information on downloading SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. For details about
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, see "Software that You Can Download", Getting Started.
Port Type
16
Printer Driver Type
Reference
Standard TCP/IP port
page 17 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port"
IPP port
page 17 "Using the IPP port"
LPR port
page 19 "Using the LPR port"
WSD port
page 20 "Using the WSD port"
SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client port
page 23 "Using the SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client port"
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection
Using the Standard TCP/IP port
1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Next].
7. Enter the machine name or IP address, and then click [Next].
When the device type selection appears, select "RICOH Network Printer C model".
8. Click [Finish].
9. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
10. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
11. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
12. Click [Finish].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
Using the IPP port
17
2. Installing the Printer Driver
• To print via IPP-SSL, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
• Installation of the certificate is especially necessary for users who want to print via IPP-SSL from
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1 or Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2. For details,
consult your administrator.
• If a certificate authority issues a certificate that must be authenticated by an intermediate certificate
authority, and the certificate is installed on this machine, an intermediate certificate must be
installed on the client computer. Otherwise, validation by the certificate authority will not be
performed correctly.
• If validation cannot be performed properly, a warning message informing you that installation is
not possible might appear when you try to add a printer using IPP-SSL under Windows Vista/
7/8/8.1 or Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2. To enable authentication from
the client computer, install the intermediate certificate on the client computer, and then reestablish
connection.
• Intermediate certificates cannot be installed on this machine.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
proceed to Step 4.
3. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
4. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
5. In the [Select a shared printer by name] box, enter "http://(machine's IP address or host
name)/printer (or ipp)" as the printer's address, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify a location for the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
18
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [Open].
9. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
10. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
The installation starts.
11. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and default
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
12. Click [Finish].
Using the LPR port
1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter the machine name or IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd:]
box.
7. Enter "lp" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
19
2. Installing the Printer Driver
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
Using the WSD port
• The WSD port can be used under Windows Vista/7/8/8.1, or Windows Server 2008/2008
R2/2012/2012 R2.
• You can connect to the printer only if both the printer and computer are on the same network
segment, or "Network discovery" is enabled. For details, see Windows Help.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Network].
2. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
3. Click [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
4. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
5. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
20
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection
6. Click [Next].
7. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.
• The port name that follows "WSD" uses random character strings. It cannot be changed freely.
• To stop the installation, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When re-installing the
WSD Port, right-click the printer's icon in the [Network] window, and then click [Uninstall].
Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Computer].
2. Click [Network].
3. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
4. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
5. Click [Add a printer].
6. Click [Add a local printer].
7. Select [Use an existing port:], and then select WSD port.
8. Click [Next].
9. Click [Have Disk...].
10. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
11. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
21
2. Installing the Printer Driver
12. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
13. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name, default printer,
and printer sharing configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
14. Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.
• To stop installation of the selected driver, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When
re-installing the WSD Port, right-click the machine's icon in the [Network] window, and then click
[Uninstall].
Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2
1. Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [X86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
22
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a Printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
14. Select the connection method.
• Windows 8
[Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer]
• Windows 8.1
[Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer]
15. Click [Next].
16. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [Next].
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
To use this function, you must first download SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the manufacturer's
Web site and install it on your computer. Contact your local dealer for information on downloading
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
6. To configure port settings using TCP/IP, click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
To configure port settings using IPP, proceed to step 11.
7. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only machines that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a machine not listed
here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address or host name of the machine.
Proceed to step 16.
8. To configure port settings using IPP, click [IPP].
23
2. Installing the Printer Driver
9. In the [Printer URL] box, enter "http://machine's IP address/printer" as the machine's
address.
If the server authentication is issued, enter "https://machine's IP address/printer" to enable SSL (a
protocol for encrypted communication). Example IP address: 192.168.15.16
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://machine's IP address/ipp" as the machine's address.
10. Enter a name for identifying the machine in the [IPP Port Name] box. Use a name
different from the one of any existing ports.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port
name.
11. Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For details about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
12. Click [OK].
13. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
14. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
15. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
16. Click [Finish].
Changing the port settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP
protocol.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
2. Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration:] window appears.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
2. Click [Printer].
3. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to use, and then click [Properties].
24
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection
4. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration:] window appears.
Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port...].
The [Port Configuration:] window appears.
Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
1. Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel].
2. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].
4. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port...].
The [Port Configuration:] window appears.
• IPP User, Proxy, and Timeout Settings can be configured for IPP.
• For details about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Using as a Network Printer
Describes the driver installation procedure for each print server. See the installation procedure for the
print server you are using.
Server OS
Client OS
Printer Driver Type
Reference
Windows Server
Windows
page 25 "Using Windows print
server"
NetWare
Windows
page 26 "Using NetWare print
server"
Using Windows print server
1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
25
2. Installing the Printer Driver
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Network Printer], and then click [Next >].
6. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.
7. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• If you print with a print server connected to the machine using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used from the client computer.
• If you print under a print server, notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client may not be
used with the client computer.
Using NetWare print server
1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
26
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
If installing the PostScript 3 printer driver, proceed to step 7.
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Network Printer], and then click [Next >].
6. Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed.
7. Select the print queue, and then click [OK].
8. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port :].
9. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
10. Click [Finish] in the [Select Program] dialog box.
11. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
12. After restarting the computer, on the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
13. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
14. Click the [NetWare Settings] tab.
15. Clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check boxes.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the printer driver. If you
select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.
16. Click [OK].
• The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable the protocol on the control panel or Web Image
Monitor.
Notes when using NetWare
Form Feed
Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on
Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not print properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:
• Clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog
box.
27
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Banner Page
Do not use NetWare to configure banner page.
Follow the procedure below to disable banner page according to the operating system used:
• Clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties
dialog box.
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
2. Right-click the printer's icon, and then click [Properties].
3. Click the [Device Settings] tab.
4. Select [No] on the [Send CTRL-D Before Each Job:] and [Send CTRL-D After Each Job:], and
then click [Apply].
5. Click [OK].
Printing after Resetting the Printer
Printer to print server connection requires 30–40 seconds to resume after the printer is reset. During
this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on NetWare specifications) but not printed.
To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server that the remote
printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to print.
28
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local
Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for USB, parallel, or Bluetooth
connection.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Yes] or
[Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 51 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
USB Connection
This section explains how to install the printer drivers using USB.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are
in progress.
If the printer driver has already been installed, and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers]
window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the machine to install it from
the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
• To disable Auto Run, press the left Shift key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it
pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
1. Check that the power of the machine is off.
2. Connect the machine and computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
29
2. Installing the Printer Driver
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. Select [No, not this time], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]], and then click [Next].
6. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box under [Search for
the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next].
7. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [Next].
The installation starts.
9. Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and
Printers] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
1. Check that the power of the machine is off.
2. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
30
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection
4. In the [Found New Hardware] window, click [Locate and install driver software
(recommended)].
5. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Close].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and
Printers] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Windows 7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
31
2. Installing the Printer Driver
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [X86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Check that the power of the machine is off.
13. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
14. Turn on the power of the machine.
Parallel Connection
1. Click [PCL Printer Drivers] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next].
If installing the PostScript 3 printer driver, proceed to step 7.
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next].
5. Select [Local Port], and then click [Next].
32
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection
6. Enter a port name, and then click [OK].
7. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
8. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
9. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
10. Click [Finish].
Select one of the options to restart the computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
Bluetooth Connection
• The Bluetooth unit and the wireless LAN unit cannot be used simultaneously.
Supported profiles and restrictions
Supported Profiles
• SPP (Serial Port Profile)
• HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
• BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
Restrictions on SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers can be connected at
the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by SPP, one by HCRP.
33
2. Installing the Printer Driver
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the
same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the
connection between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
Restrictions on BIP
• PostScript 3 must be installed on the printer to connect via BIP.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
• You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.
Adding a Bluetooth printer
If your computer is running SP1 or an earlier version of Windows XP, there are additional applications
that you must install. For details about these, see the Help supplied with your Bluetooth device.
• To connect to a Bluetooth printer, your computer must have a Bluetooth device installed. Make sure
a Bluetooth device is installed on your computer.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Click [Next].
4. Click [Bluetooth Printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth printers.
If a new printer is discovered, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] window appears. To ignore a
discovered device and continue searching, click [Cancel]. The computer resumes searching for
other available Bluetooth printers.
5. Click [No, I will not connect], and then click [Next].
6. Click [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next].
7. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box, and then click
[Next].
8. If the [Hardware Installation] window appears, click [Continue].
9. If the installation was successful, click [Finish].
34
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection
10. Select [Test Print], and then click [Next].
11. Click [Finish].
• Actual Bluetooth printer operations will vary according to your Bluetooth device and/or Bluetoothinstalled computer. For details, see the Help supplied with your Bluetooth device and/or Bluetoothequipped computer.
• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
2. In the "Hardware and Sound" area, click [Printers].
3. In the top part of the window, click [Add a printer].
4. In the [Add Printer] window, select [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer], and
then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
5. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
All discovered wireless printers appear in the list of discovered printers, not only Bluetooth printers.
Make sure the machine you select is a Bluetooth printer.
6. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)] on the [Found New
Hardware] display.
7. In the [Found New Hardware] window, select the printer driver you want to use, and
then click [Next].
The installation starts.
8. If the [Windows Security] window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
9. Click [Close].
10. If you want to change the printer name, enter the new name in the [Printer Name
Settings] window.
11. If you want to print a test page, click [Printing Test Page] on the "Test Print" page.
Otherwise, click [Finish].
• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.
35
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [X86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
14. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
15. Select [Add a Bluetooth printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
16. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
17. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and shared
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
36
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection
18. Click [Finish].
• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.
Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2
1. Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [X86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
37
2. Installing the Printer Driver
14. Select [Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
15. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
16. Click [Next].
17. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and shared
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
18. Click [Finish].
• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.
38
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
When bidirectional communication works correctly, your computer obtains information about option,
paper size and paper feed direction settings from the machine automatically. Bidirectional
communication also allows you to monitor machine status.
When bidirectional communication is disabled, you have to set up option, paper size and paper feed
direction settings on your computer manually.
• Manage Printers permission is required to enable bidirectional communication or to configure the
option settings. Log on as an Administrators group member.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and
parallel connectors.
When connected with the network
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
• The TCP/IP protocol or the IPP protocol is used. (When using the IPP protocol, the IPP
port name must include the IP address.)
When connected with USB
• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.
• The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers support bidirectional communication and automatic
printer status updates.
• To obtain printer information automatically using the bidirectional communication function of the
PCL 6 or PostScript 3 printer driver, you must select the [Automatically Update Printer Information]
check box on the [Accessories] tab in the printer driver's properties window.
39
2. Installing the Printer Driver
• The PCL 5e printer driver supports bidirectional communication. You can update the printer status
manually.
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled
This section describes how to set up option, paper size and paper feed direction settings on your
computer manually.
1. Open the printer window.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this case, no
change is necessary for option settings.
4. Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
5. Click [Change Input Tray Settings...].
6. In [Input Tray:] select which trays to use, and then, in [Paper Size:] select the size of the
paper that you want to load in each tray.
Click [Modify Input Tray/Paper Size] to apply the setting for each tray.
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Apply].
9. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
40
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
• For details about making option settings for the machine using a Mac OS X, see page 39
"Configuring Option Settings for the Printer".
41
2. Installing the Printer Driver
42
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
This chapter explains how to install the TWAIN Driver on a client computer. Installing procedures on
Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.
Installing the TWAIN Driver
To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN Driver on a client computer.
• To use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application must be
installed on the client computer.
1. Click [TWAIN Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The installer of the TWAIN Driver starts. Follow the instructions.
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the TWAIN Driver. For details
about the system requirements, see page 5 "Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM".
• When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client computer may appear. In
this case, restart the client computer.
• After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in use is added in
[Programs], [All Programs], or [Apps] on the [Start] menu. Help can be displayed from here.
• Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in "Readme.txt". Be sure to read them
before use.
43
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
44
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the LAN-Fax Driver on a client computer. Installing
procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver
Address Book and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor are installed with the LAN-Fax Driver. Address Book
helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax
cover sheets.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP port. Use the SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client port.
Specifying the Same Port as the Printer Driver
If a port name that is the same as one that is already in use by the existing driver is specified, the LANFax Driver installation may fail. If the printer driver is already installed, make sure that the port numbers
of the LAN-Fax Driver and the printer driver match.
1. Click [LAN-Fax Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the same port as the one selected in the printer driver from the [Select from the port
list], and then click [Next >].
5. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
6. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Finish].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
45
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
Specifying the Port When Installing the LAN-Fax Driver
To specify a port that is different from the printer driver when installing the LAN-Fax Driver, see the
installation procedure of the printer driver.
If places where the procedure or description differs depending on the driver to be installed, replace the
corresponding procedure or description accordingly, and install the driver.
Corresponding items to
replace
Installation procedures
page 17 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port"
1, 2
page 17 "Using the IPP port"
3
page 19 "Using the LPR port"
1, 2
page 20 "Using the WSD port"
3
page 23 "Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port"
1, 2
List of Items to Replace
No.
46
Items to be replaced
Procedure/description in the
printer driver
Procedure/description in the
LAN-Fax Driver
1
The name of the button that
starts the installation
procedure
Click [PCL Printer Driver] or
[PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
2
The procedures in the [Install
Printer Driver] dialog box
Select the check box of the
machine model you want to
use.
Select [Printer Name: <LANFax Generic>].
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver
No.
Items to be replaced
Procedure/description in the
printer driver
Procedure/description in the
LAN-Fax Driver
The LAN-Fax Driver is
installed in the following
folder:
• 32-bit driver
3
The destination folder in
which the driver files are
stored
The destination folder is
written in the description.
X86\DRIVERS\LANFAX\XP_VISTA
\DISK1\LANG\
(Language)
• 64-bit driver
X64\DRIVERS\LANFAX
\X64\DISK1\LANG\
(Language)
47
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties
• Manage Printers permission is required to set the properties for the LAN-Fax Driver. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
• The method for selecting the LAN-Fax Driver will vary according to your operating system. For
details, see Windows Help.
Setting Print Properties
This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.
1. Open the printer window.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Printing preferences].
3. To set the following properties.
• Document Size:
• Orientation:
• Input Tray:
• Resolution:
• Spool Data in EMF Format
4. Click [OK].
48
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties
Configuring Option Settings for the Facsimile
1. Open the printer windows.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for the option configuration.
4. Select the check boxes for the installed optional units.
5. Click [Apply].
Option configuration settings are complete.
6. Click [OK].
[Accessories] tab
The [Accessories] tab contains the following items besides option configuration items.
Misc
• Enable Email
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
• Prohibit manual destination entry
Select this check box when manual destination entry is set as prohibited from the machine.
• No. of Entries to Fix Destination
Specify the number of entries to fix the destinations when to enter destinations directly. You
can enter a value between 1 and 15.
49
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
• Check Destination
Select the check box to confirm the destinations before sending.
IP-Fax
To use IP-Fax, select the [Enable IP-Fax] check box, and then specify the protocol in [Valid
protocol:].
• If the options on this machine are not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax functions may fail.
• If this machine is connected to a network, configuration of each option installed on the machine will
be performed automatically. If the settings do not match the installed optional units, click [Update
Now].
50
5. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for driver installation and USB connection problems.
Messages Displayed When Installing the
Printer Driver
This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the
printer driver using Add Printer Wizard.
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed.
1. Open the printer window.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
51
5. Troubleshooting
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
4. Specify a port.
• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For
details, see page 11 "Confirming the Connection Method".
52
If USB Connection Fails
If USB Connection Fails
This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connections.
Problem
Causes
Solutions
The machine is not
automatically recognized.
The USB cable is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
computer, and then turn off the main
power switch. Turn on the main power
switch again. When the machine has
fully booted up, reconnect the USB
cable.
Windows has already
configured the USB settings.
Check whether the computer Open Windows' Device Manager,
has identified the machine as and then, under [Universal Serial Bus
an unsupported device.
controllers], remove any conflicting
devices. Conflicting devices have a [!]
or [?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.
The machine does not
recognize the USB
connection even when a
USB cable is inserted.
If the USB cable is
connected while the
machine is off, the machine
might not recognize the USB
connection.
Press the operation switch, and then
disconnect the USB cable from the
computer. When the machine has
returned to the ready condition,
reconnect the USB cable.
53
5. Troubleshooting
54
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under
Mac OS X
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the Mac OS X operating
system.
Installing the PPD Files
To print using the printer specific features under Mac OS X, install the PPD files.
• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network
administrator.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see the "Readme.txt" file, located
on the CD-ROM root directory.
1. Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
2. Double-click the [(brand name)] folder.
3. Double-click the [Mac OS X 10.6] or [Mac OS X 10.7 or later] folder.
4. Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.
5. Double-click the package file icon.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
• The PPD files will be automatically installed in the following location:
• \Library\Printers\PPDs\Contents\Resources\
55
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under Mac OS X
Registering the Printer
To use the machine, the printer must be registered in the printer list.
Make sure the machine and computer are connected and turned on, and perform the following
procedure.
For details about how to connect the machine to the computer, see "Connecting the Machine",
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, the printer language does not
change automatically. Use the control panel on this machine to change the printer language to
[Auto] or [PS] before printing.
• The operating procedure under Mac OS X differs depending on the version of the operating
system. Consult the procedure described in this manual, and make the necessary settings according
to the manual of each version.
USB Connection
• Make sure the computer and the printer are connected using the USB cable, and the power of the
devices are turned on beforehand.
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan].
3. Click the [ ] button.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "USB" indicated in the [Kind] column.
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer, [Select a
driver to use...], or [Select Printer Software...] in the pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 55 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure...] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.
56
Registering the Printer
Network Connection
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan].
3. Click the [ ] button.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network environment
(TCP/IP, etc.).
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer, [Select a
driver to use...], or [Select Printer Software...] in the pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 55 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure...] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.
57
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under Mac OS X
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
Under Mac OS X
This section explains how to configure the printer driver.
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click [Driver], and then configure settings as needed.
5. Click [OK].
6. Quit System Preferences.
• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
58
7. Appendix
Updating or Deleting the Driver
• Administrator permission is required to update or delete the driver in use. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
• For driver updates, select a driver that is compatible with the printer and driver type you are using.
An error may result if you select a driver that is not compatible with the printer and driver type.
• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
Updating the Driver
Printer driver / LAN-Fax driver
You can download the most recent version of the driver from the manufacturer's Web site. Download the
latest driver, and then perform the following procedure.
1. Open the printer window.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
59
7. Appendix
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab.
4. Click [New Driver...], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Have Disk...].
6. Click [Browse...], and then select the driver location.
7. Click [OK].
8. Select the machine model, and then click [Next].
9. Click [Finish].
The driver update starts.
10. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
11. Restart the computer.
PPD files (Mac OS X), TWAIN driver
You can download the most recent version of the drivers from the manufacturer's Web site.
Delete the old version of the driver first, and then install the new driver. For details about how to delete
the driver, see page 60 "Deleting the Driver".
Deleting the Driver
Printer driver / LAN-Fax driver
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. Click [Server Properties] on the [File] menu.
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove].
6. Click [Yes].
7. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and
Sound] category.
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
60
Updating or Deleting the Driver
3. On the [File] menu, point to [Run as administrator], and then click [Server Properties...].
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
6. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
7. Click [Yes].
8. Click [Delete].
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
Windows 7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Remove device].
3. Click [Yes].
4. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
5. Click the [Drivers] tab.
6. Click the [Change Driver Settings] button if it is displayed.
7. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
8. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
9. Click [Yes].
10. Click [Delete].
11. Click [OK].
12. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
PPD files (Mac OS X)
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Print & Fax] or [Print & Scan].
3. Select the printer you want to delete, click the [ ] button.
4. Click [Delete Printer].
61
7. Appendix
TWAIN driver
1. Start uninstaller.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Add or Remove Programs].
• Windows Vista/7, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Uninstall a program].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [Uninstall a program].
2. Remove the TWAIN driver.
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
1. Select the driver you want to delete.
2. Click [Change/Remove].
• Windows Vista/7/8/8.1, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 /2012/2012 R2:
1. Select the driver you want to delete.
2. Click [Uninstall/Change] or [Uninstall].
3. Quit uninstaller.
62
Trademarks
Trademarks
Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Citrix Presentation Server and Citrix XenApp are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more
of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries.
Macintosh, Mac OS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Monotype is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
NetWare, IPX, IPX/SPX are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
63
7. Appendix
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
64
INDEX
B
O
Bidirectional communication................................ 39
BIP........................................................................... 33
Bluetooth................................................................ 33
Bluetooth printer.................................................... 34
Option settings.......................................... 39, 49, 58
P
CD-ROM.................................................................. 5
Confirming the connection method...................... 11
Connection fails..................................................... 53
Parallel connection................................................ 32
PCL.........................................................5, 14, 16, 25
PostScript 3..................................................5, 16, 25
PPD............................................................................ 5
Printer driver................................................ 5, 16, 29
Printer port type..................................................... 16
D
Q
Delete............................................................... 59, 60
Quick Install........................................................... 14
E
R
Error message........................................................ 51
Registering the printer........................................... 56
F
S
Facsimile................................................................. 45
Scanner.................................................................. 43
Setting print properties.......................................... 48
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.............. 23, 24
Software................................................................... 5
SPP.......................................................................... 33
Standard TCP/IP port........................................... 17
Supported language............................................... 6
Supported profiles and restrictions...................... 33
C
H
HCRP...................................................................... 33
I
Installer..................................................................... 3
IPP port................................................................... 17
L
LAN-Fax driver.................................................. 8, 45
LAN-Fax driver properties.................................... 48
Launcher................................................................... 3
Local connection............................................. 12, 29
LPR port...................................................................19
M
Mac OS X................................................................ 9
Messages displayed when installing the printer
driver...................................................................... 51
N
NetWare......................................................... 25, 27
NetWare print server............................................ 26
Network connection................................. 11, 16, 57
Network printer............................................... 12, 25
T
Trademarks............................................................ 63
TWAIN driver.................................................... 7, 43
U
Uninstall.................................................................. 60
Update................................................................... 59
USB connection........................................ 29, 53, 56
Utilities...................................................................... 5
W
Windows print server............................................ 25
Windows Server.................................................... 25
WSD port............................................................... 20
65
MEMO
66
MEMO
67
MEMO
68
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
D202-7483
EN
GB
EN
US
EN
AU
D202-7483
© 2014
© 2013
D687-8860
Notes for Users
This supplement provides notes and corrections for the manuals provided with this
machine.
●● Some of the internal components of this machine might be fragile. When you remove
jammed paper, do not touch the sensors shown in this manual. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
■■ Main Unit
DGQ001
■■ LCIT PB3230
DGQ002
■■ Paper Feed Unit PB3220
DGQ003
■■ Paper Feed Unit PB3150
DGQ005
DGQ004
: Sensors
‹‹Fax
Facsimile Features > Send Settings > Backup File TX Setting
Additional information
• When the specified destination is updated using the central address book management function, the
spooled documents are sent to the destination after updating.
‹‹Scan
1. Sending Scanned Documents to a Client Computer > Specifying the Destination or Recipient > Selecting the Destination from the Machine’s Address Book> Searching the machine’s
address book for the destination and selecting it > Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder > Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder > Entering the Path to the Destination Manually
> Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder
Additional information
• When the specified destination is updated using the central address book management function, the
spooled documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about central address book management, see “Administrator Tools”, Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
‹‹Maintenance and Specifications
Specifications > Specifications for Scanner
Correction
Topic
Error
Scan speed (the machine equipped
with the ARDF):Black and white
70 pages/minute
Scan speed (the machine equipped
with the ARDF):Full Color
70 pages/minute
Corrections
80 pages/minute,
79 pages/minute
80 pages/minute,
79 pages/minute
‹‹Connecting the Machine/ System Settings
System Settings > Timer Settings
Correction
Topic
Sleep Mode Timer
Error
The time can be set from 1 to 240
minutes, using the number keys.
Corrections
The time can be set from 1 to 60
minutes, using the number keys.
© 2014
Printed in Thailand
EN US EN AU
D202-7058A
Read This First
Manuals Provided with This Machine
Safety Information for This Machine
Other Information for This Machine
Appendix
Please look at the on-screen instruction manual
(included in the attached CD-ROM) or the manual
viewable via the Smart Operation Panel for information
not included in the paper instruction manual.
Printed in France
EN GB
D146-7565
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 3
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................3
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................3
Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 4
Machine Types............................................................................................................................................... 4
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the Standard Operation Panel).....................................................5
Manuals List (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)....................................................................... 7
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the Smart Operation Panel).......................................................... 9
Manuals List (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)...........................................................................11
How to Use the Operating Instructions...........................................................................................................13
Formats of the Operating Instructions (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)............................13
Formats of the Operating Instructions (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)..................................13
Reading the HTML Manuals on the CD-ROM (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)............. 13
Installing and Opening the HTML Manuals (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)..................14
Reading the PDF Manuals on the CD-ROM..............................................................................................15
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Safety Information............................................................................................................................................ 17
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................................................17
Safety Precautions to Be Followed............................................................................................................. 17
Safety Labels of This Machine.........................................................................................................................26
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels.........................................................................................26
Power Switch Symbols.................................................................................................................................29
3. Other Information for This Machine
Laws and Regulations...................................................................................................................................... 31
Duplication and Printing Prohibited............................................................................................................ 31
Laser Safety.................................................................................................................................................. 31
Notes to Users of Facsimile Unit................................................................................................................. 32
Overseas Affiliates and Noise Emission Information................................................................................ 33
EMC Directive.............................................................................................................................................. 33
Other Information.............................................................................................................................................34
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment.........................................................................34
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)............................................35
1
Environmental Advice for Users..................................................................................................................35
4. Appendix
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 37
2
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
Indicates instructions stored in a file on a provided CD-ROM.
Indicates instructions displayed on the Smart Operation Panel.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model-Specific Information",
Getting Started .
Disclaimer
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
3
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
Notes
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Colors on color keys or the color circle may differ slightly from the colors of actual copies.
The color samples in this manual may differ slightly from the colors of actual copies.
Machine Types
Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.
Type 1: MP C3003SP/MP C3003ZSP
Type 2: MP C3503SP/MP C3503ZSP
Type 3: MP C4503SP/MP C4503ASP/MP C4503ZSP/MP C4503AZSP
Type 4: MP C5503SP/MP C5503ASP/MP C5503ZSP/MP C5503AZSP
Type 5: MP C6003SP/MP C6003ZSP
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
4
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
This chapter explains manuals for this machine.
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine.
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
• Media differ according to manual.
• Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF
files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
User Guide
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting when an
error message appears, etc., summaries are provided below for each user manual.
Read This First
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information. It
also describes how to install the included CD-ROM, each regulation, and environmental
conformance.
Easy Search
You can search for a description by what you want to do. Also, this machine's distinctive functions
are explained.
Getting Started
Describes preparations for using the machine, operating instructions, and character input methods.
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Describes how to load originals and sheets and about their specifications.
Convenient Functions
Describes how to register frequently used settings, customize the Home Screen, and display a Web
page on the control panel. It also describes how to manage a job.
Maintenance and Specifications
Describes how to replace supplies and how to install and clean this machine. It also describes the
specifications of the main unit and options.
5
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide for resolving common usage-related problems.
Copy/ Document Server
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to specify the settings for originals.
Fax
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
Print
Describes how to print using the printer driver. It also describes the functions available for printing.
Scan
Describes how to scan paper data using this machine and how to send the scanned data to a
computer and store the data.
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings
Explains how to connect the machine to a network, and configure and operate the machine in a
network environment. Also explains how to change User Tools settings and how to register
information in the Address Book.
PostScript 3
Explains how to set up and use PostScript® 3TM.
Extended Feature Settings
Describes how to configure the extended features using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.
Security Guide
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator.
For details, see "Before Using This Machine", Security Guide
.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.
• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
6
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)
• Driver Installation Guide and HTML manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian,
Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
• You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an IT security
certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from the following URLs. This information is about
how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified machine, be sure to read it
before operating the machine so you can make the correct settings before using it.
• Type 1 and 2
http://support-download.com/services/device/ccmanual/mp_c3003_c3503/en/
download_admin.html
http://support-download.com/services/device/ccmanual/mp_c3003_c3503/en/
download_user.html
• Type 3, 4, and 5
http://support-download.com/services/device/ccmanual/
mp_c4503_c5503_c6003/en/download_admin.html
http://support-download.com/services/device/ccmanual/
mp_c4503_c5503_c6003/en/download_user.html
• The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and
ScanRouterEX Enterprise *1
General name
the ScanRouter delivery software
*1 The ScanRouter EX Professional and ScanRouterEX Enterprise are no longer available for sale.
Manuals List (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)
Printed Manuals
Provided
HTML Manuals
Provided
PDF Manuals
Provided
User Guide
No
No
Yes
Read This First
Yes
No
No
Easy Search
No
Yes
No
Getting Started
No
Yes
No
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
No
Yes
No
Convenient Functions
No
Yes
No
Manual Name
7
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Printed Manuals
Provided
HTML Manuals
Provided
PDF Manuals
Provided
Maintenance and Specifications
No
Yes
No
Troubleshooting
No
Yes
No
Copy/ Document Server
No
Yes
No
Fax
No
Yes
No
Print
No
Yes
No
Scan
No
Yes
No
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings
No
Yes
No
PostScript 3
No
Yes
No
Extended Feature Settings
No
Yes
No
Security Guide
No
No
Yes
Driver Installation Guide
No
No
Yes
Manual Name
• Driver Installation Guide and HTML manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian,
Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
8
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the
Smart Operation Panel)
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine.
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
• Media differ according to manual.
• Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF
files.
User Guide
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting when an
error message appears, etc., summaries are provided below for each user manual.
Read This First
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information. It
also describes how to read the manual on the provided CD-ROM, each regulation, and
environmental conformance.
Start Guide
Describes how to read manuals on the Smart Operation Panel. It also describes how to log in to the
machine.
Easy Search
You can search for a description by what you want to do. Also, this machine's distinctive functions
are explained.
Getting Started
Describes preparations for using the machine, operating instructions, and character input methods.
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Describes how to load originals and sheets and about their specifications.
Convenient Functions
Describes how to register frequently used settings, customize the Home Screen, and display a Web
page on the control panel. It also describes how to manage a job.
Maintenance and Specifications
Describes how to replace supplies and how to install and clean this machine. It also describes the
specifications of the main unit and options.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide for resolving common usage-related problems.
9
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Copy/ Document Server
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to specify the settings for originals.
Fax
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
Print
Describes how to print using the printer driver. It also describes the functions available for printing.
Scan
Describes how to scan paper data using this machine and how to send the scanned data to a
computer and store the data.
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings
Explains how to connect the machine to a network, and configure and operate the machine in a
network environment. Also explains how to change User Tools settings and how to register
information in the Address Book.
PostScript 3
Explains how to set up and use PostScript® 3TM.
Extended Feature Settings
Describes how to configure the extended features using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.
Security Guide
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator.
For details, see "Before Using This Machine", Security Guide .
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.
OtherManuals
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference FAX Guide
• Quick Reference Scan Guide
10
Manuals for This Machine (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
• Driver Installation Guide and manuals displayed on the Smart Operation Panel are available in
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
• User Guide is available in Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Portuguese, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Catalan, Turkish, Greek, and Brazilian Portuguese.
• The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and
ScanRouterEX Enterprise *1
General name
the ScanRouter delivery software
*1 The ScanRouter EX Professional and ScanRouterEX Enterprise are no longer available for sale.
Manuals List (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
Printed Manuals
Provided
Manuals
displayed on the
Smart Operation
Panel
PDF Manuals
Provided
User Guide
No
Yes
No
Read This First
Yes
No
No
Start Guide
Yes
No
No
Easy Search
No
Yes
No
Getting Started
No
Yes
No
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
No
Yes
No
Convenient Functions
No
Yes
No
Maintenance and Specifications
No
Yes
No
Troubleshooting
No
Yes
No
Copy/ Document Server
No
Yes
No
Fax
No
Yes
No
Manual Name
11
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Printed Manuals
Provided
Manuals
displayed on the
Smart Operation
Panel
PDF Manuals
Provided
Print
No
Yes
No
Scan
No
Yes
No
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings
No
Yes
No
PostScript 3
No
Yes
No
Extended Feature Settings
No
Yes
No
Security Guide
No
Yes
No
Driver Installation Guide
No
No
Yes
Quick Reference Copy Guide
No
No
Yes *1
Quick Reference FAX Guide
No
No
Yes *1
Quick Reference Scan Guide
No
No
Yes *1
Manual Name
*1 For these manuals, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
• Driver Installation Guide and manuals displayed on the Smart Operation Panel are available in
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
• User Guide is available in Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Portuguese, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Catalan, Turkish, Greek, and Brazilian Portuguese.
12
How to Use the Operating Instructions
How to Use the Operating Instructions
This chapter describes the operating instructions of this machine. HTML and PDF manuals are included in
the supplied CD-ROMs.
Formats of the Operating Instructions (When Using the Standard Operation
Panel)
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:
• Printed manuals
• HTML manuals
• PDF manuals
For details about the contents of each manual, see page 5 "Manuals for This Machine (When Using the
Standard Operation Panel)". The various manuals are available in different formats. For details about
availability, see page 7 "Manuals List (When Using the Standard Operation Panel)".
Formats of the Operating Instructions (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:
• Printed manuals
• Manuals displayed on the Smart Operation Panel
• PDF manuals
For details about the contents of each manual, see page 9 "Manuals for This Machine (When Using the
Smart Operation Panel)". The various manuals are available in different formats. For details about
availability, see page 11 "Manuals List (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)".
For details about how to read the manuals on the Smart Operation Panel, see Start Guide.
Reading the HTML Manuals on the CD-ROM (When Using the Standard
Operation Panel)
This section describes how to read the HTML manuals on the supplied manual CD-ROM.
1. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].
3. Click [Read HTML manuals].
The browser opens.
13
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
4. Click the title of manual you want to read.
• Recommended browsers:
• Internet Explorer 6 or later
• Firefox 3.5 or later
• Safari 4.0 or later
• If you want to read the HTML manuals on a Macintosh, insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive,
and then open "Manuals.htm".
• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• HTML manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
Installing and Opening the HTML Manuals (When Using the Standard
Operation Panel)
This section describes how to install and open the HTML manuals on your computer.
For your convenience, we recommend you install these manuals on your computer.
1. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].
3. Click [Install manuals].
4. Install the HTML manuals by following the on-screen instructions.
5. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].
6. Click [Exit].
7. Open the HTML manuals that you installed.
To open the manuals from an icon, double-click the icon on the desktop. To open the manuals from
the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], and then click [Product Name].
8. Click the title of the manual you want to read.
• You need administrator permissions to install the manuals. Log in as an Administrators group
member.
• The system requirements for installing the manuals are as follows:
• Operating system: Windows XP/Vista/7/8, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008
R2/2012
• Minimum display resolution: 800 × 600 pixels
14
How to Use the Operating Instructions
• If you cannot install a manual, copy the "MANUAL_HTML" folder to your computer's hard drive,
and then run "setup.exe".
• To delete an installed manual, on the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], click [Product Name],
and then uninstall the data.
• Depending on the settings made during installation, menu folder names may differ.
• HTML manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
Reading the PDF Manuals on the CD-ROM
This section describes how to read the PDF manuals on the supplied CD-ROMs.
File path (when using the Standard Operation Panel)
• Operating instructions other than Driver Installation Guide are included in the following folder
on the supplied manual CD-ROM:
MANUAL_PDF\(language)
• Driver Installation Guide is included in the following folder on the supplied driver CD-ROM:
MANUAL_DRIVER\(language)
File path (when using the Smart Operation Panel)
Driver Installation Guide is included in the following folder on the supplied driver CD-ROM:
MANUAL_DRIVER\(language)
1. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].
3. Click [Read PDF manuals].
To read Driver Installation Guide, click [Driver Installation Guide]. The manual opens.
4. Click the title of the manual you want to view.
• To view the PDF manuals, you need to have Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader installed on
your computer.
• If you want to read the PDF manuals on a Macintosh, insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive,
and then open "Manuals.htm".
• Driver Installation Guide is available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and
Russian.
15
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
16
2. Safety Information for This Machine
This chapter describes the safety precautions.
Safety Information
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death
or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor
or moderate injury or damage to property.
Safety Precautions to Be Followed
This section explains safety precautions that should always be followed when using this machine.
Environments where the machine can be used
This section explains safety precautions about environments where the machine can be used.
• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might
occur.
17
2. Safety Information for This Machine
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might
occur.
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine to topple over,
possibly resulting in injury.
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
Handling power cords and power cord plugs
This section explains safety precautions about handling power cords and power cord plugs.
• Do not use any power sources other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so
could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use any frequencies other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use multi-socket adaptors. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use extension cords. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
18
Safety Information
• Do not use power cords that are damaged, broken, or modified. Also, do not use power cords
that have been trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or bent severely. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• The supplied power cord is for use with this machine only. Do not use it with other appliances.
Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• If the power cord is damaged and its inner wires are exposed or broken, contact your service
representative for a replacement. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.
19
2. Safety Information for This Machine
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to push the plug of the power cord fully into the wall outlet. Partially inserted plugs
create an unstable connection that can result in unsafe buildup of heat.
• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.
Handling the main machine
This section explains safety precautions about handling the main machine.
20
Safety Information
• Be sure to locate the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet. This will allow easy
disconnection of the power cord in the event of an emergency.
• If the machine emits smoke or odours, or if it behaves unusually, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• If metal objects, or water or other fluids fall inside this machine, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity. Doing so could
result in electric shock.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on
the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly
resulting in injury.
21
2. Safety Information for This Machine
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.
• If the lower paper tray is installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time when you are
changing or replenishing paper or resolving paper jams. Pressing down forcefully on the
machine's upper surfaces can result in malfunctions and/or user injury.
• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in
malfunction and risk of injury to users.
• Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.
• Do not hold the control panel while moving the machine. Doing so may damage the control
panel, cause a malfunction, or result in injury.
• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.
Handling the machine's interior
This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's interior.
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in this manual. Inside
this machine are high voltage components that are an electric shock hazard and laser
components that could cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any of the
machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or repair.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so risks burns and electric shock.
Note again that exposure to the laser components inside this machine risks blindness.
22
Safety Information
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating the
"hot surface". Otherwise, an injury might occur.
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when removing misfed paper, pulling out or
pushing in the finisher's staple unit. You can trap and injure your fingers if you do not.
• While safety measures have been installed to prevent accidents, you must not touch the
machine's rollers while it is operating. Doing so could cause injury.
• If the machine's interior is not cleaned regularly, dust will accumulate. Fire and breakdown can
result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this machine. Contact your sales or service
representative for details about and charges for cleaning the machine's interior.
Handling the machine's supplies
This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's supplies.
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
23
2. Safety Information for This Machine
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
24
Safety Information
• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• Do not attempt to print on stapled sheets, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of
conductive paper. Doing so risks fire.
• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.
25
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Safety Labels of This Machine
This section explains the machine's safety information labels.
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels
This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety,
please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.
Main unit
1
CUZ001
1.
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the machine could be very hot. Caution should be
taken when removing misfed paper.
26
Safety Labels of This Machine
Paper trays
1
2
3
CUZ002
1.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.
2.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.
3.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.
27
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Finisher SR3140 or Booklet Finisher SR3150
3
1
2
CUZ007
1.
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper revolve. Take care not to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
2.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not. Take care not to touch the booklet
finisher tray during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
3.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.
28
Safety Labels of This Machine
Finisher SR3160 or Booklet Finisher SR3170
3
1
2
4
CUZ004
1.
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper revolve. Take care not to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
2.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not. Take care not to touch the booklet
finisher tray during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
3.
During operation, rollers for transporting the paper revolve. Take care not to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
4.
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.
Power Switch Symbols
The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows:
•
: POWER ON
•
: STANDBY
29
2. Safety Information for This Machine
30
3. Other Information for This Machine
This chapter describes laws and regulations related to this machine.
Laws and Regulations
Duplication and Printing Prohibited
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
This machine is equipped with a function that prevents making counterfeit bank bills. Due to this function
the original images similar to bank bills may not be copied properly.
Laser Safety
Laser Safety for Type 1 and 2
This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825-1:2007 (EN60825-1:2007) for class 1
laser product. The machine contains four AlGaInP laser diodes, 655–663 nanometer wavelength for
each emitter. The beam divergence angle is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the
vertical direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and
laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power of the light
source is 10 milliwatt.
The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the manuals
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
31
3. Other Information for This Machine
Laser Safety for Type 3, 4, and 5
This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825-1:2007 (EN60825-1:2007) for class 1
laser product. The machine contains four 4ch-Laser Diode Arrays (4ch-LDA). Laser diodes are AlGaInP,
657–663 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. The beam divergence angle is 16 degrees
(minimum) and 23 degrees (maximum) in the vertical direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 12
degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave
(CW) mode. Each 4ch-LDA has four light sources and the maximum output power of the light source is
17 milliwatt.
The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the manuals
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes to Users of Facsimile Unit
Declaration of Conformity
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of
the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Notice to Users Accessing Analog PSTN in EEA Countries
This product is designed to be able to access analog PSTN in all EEA countries. Local PSTN
compatibility is dependent on software switch settings. Please contact your service representative if
relocating this product to another country. In the event of problems, please contact your service
representative in the first instance.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/ and selecting the product applicable.
32
Laws and Regulations
Overseas Affiliates and Noise Emission Information
In accordance with TUV “GS Symbol” requirements, details of the EU office or representative
company are given below.
Overseas Affiliates
Ricoh Europe PLC
20 Triton Street, London. NW1 3BF, United Kingdom
Noise Emission
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV:
Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779
EMC Directive
Installing the Ferrite Core
A network interface cable and a telephone line cable with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference
suppression.
33
3. Other Information for This Machine
Other Information
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
All Other Users
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
For Users in India
This product complies with the "India E-waste Rule 2011" and prohibits use of lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2
of the Rule.
34
Other Information
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Environmental Advice for Users
Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway
Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.
https://www.ricoh-return.com/
35
3. Other Information for This Machine
Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.
Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.
36
4. Appendix
This appendix describes trademarks for the machine.
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, PostScript 3, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Macintosh and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The proper name of Internet Explorer 6 is Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
37
4. Appendix
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
38
MEMO
39
MEMO
40
EN GB
D146-7565
Start Guide
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy
for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety
Information in “Read This First” before using the machine.
This document describes how to read the
operating instructions on the Smart Operation
Panel.
Touch your finger on the screen
softly, and then slide (or “flick”)
the screen to the left.
CZP131
Open the operating instructions according to the
following procedure when using the Smart
Operation Panel.
Press the [User Guide] icon.
How to Read the Operating
Instructions
Make sure the power cord is firmly
plugged into the wall outlet.
Open the main power switch cover,
and push the main power switch.
CZP101
The main power indicator lights up and the
power turns on.
CZP112
•• You can display the operating instructions via a
network. Connect the machine to a network. For
details, see Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings or contact your administrator.
•• Unless you can connect this machine to the
network, browse User Guide from a computer or
other device that can be connected to the
network. For details, check the manufacturer’s
website.
•• Operating instructions describe procedures
using the screens for the Standard Operation
Panel. They differ from the screens for the Smart
Operation Panel, but the procedures are the
same. If the procedures differ between the
Standard Operation Panel and Smart Operation
Panel, they are described separately as follows:
“when using the Standard Operation Panel” and
“when using the Smart Operation Panel”. Read
the procedure under “When using the Smart
Operation Panel”.
•• For details about the operating instructions, see
“Manuals Provided with This Machine”, Read
This First.
•• For details about symbols used in the operating
instructions, see Help.
•• Some illustrations in this manual might be
slightly different from the machine.
Logging In and Logging Out
•• Ask the user administrator for the Login User
Name, Login Password, and User Code.
•• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized
persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.
■■ Logging in to the machine
❖❖ When User Code Authentication is
active
Enter a User Code (up to eight
digits), using the soft keyboard
that appears and then press
[OK].
❖❖ When Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or
Integration Server Authentication is
active
Press [Login] on the top right on
the screen.
■■ Logging out from the machine
❖❖ When User Code Authentication is
active
Press [
] on the top right on
the screen.
•• If you can use the machine, you can say that
you are logged in. When you go out of the
operable state, you can say that you are
logged out.
•• If Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or
Integration Server Authentication is active,
the authentication screen appears on the
display. The machine only becomes operable
after entering your own Login User Name
and Login Password. If User Code
Authentication is active, you cannot use the
machine until you enter the User Code.
CZP132
CZP134
❖❖ When Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication,
or Integration Server Authentication is
active
Press [User Name].
Press [Logout] on the top right
on the screen.
CZP114
The soft keyboard is displayed on the
screen.
Enter a Login User Name, and
then press [Done].
CZP133
Press [Password].
The soft keyboard is displayed on the
screen.
Enter a Login Password, and
then press [Done].
Press [Login].
Press [OK].
If there is no response when you touch the screen,
contact your service representative.
© 2013
Printed in Japan
EN US EN AU
D146-7563A
Start Guide
Quick Reference Copy Guide
cPlease
*The shape of the machine, screen displays,
procedures, and titles in references vary depending
on the machine you are using. Also, not all functions
are available on all machines.
Tips
Paper Size
put this guide above your machineg
6. Media access lamp
7. Media slots
8. {Stop} key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as
copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
9. [#] (Enter key)
10. [Sample Copy]
1. {Home} key
Press to display the [Home] screen.
2. Display panel
3. [Reset]
Press to clear the current settings.
4. Energy Saver
5. Main power indicator
11. [Start]
Press to start copying, printing,
scanning, or sending.
12. [C] (Clear key)
Press to delete a number entered.
13. Number keys
14. [Simplfied Scrn.]
15. [Interrupt mode]
16. [Recall/Program/Change Program]
Press to register frequently used
settings, or to recall registered settings.
17. {Check Status} key
18. {Menu} key
19. {Return} key
1
2
3
4
5
How to use in copy mode...
B Enter a user name,
file name, or password
if necessary.
6
Auto Paper Select
Selects a suitable size of paper automatically.
C Specify a folder in which to store the document if necessary.
19
(Placing Originals, Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper, Basic Copying)
D Press [OK].
E Place the originals.
18
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the control
panel. Flick the screen to the left, and then press
the [Copier] icon on the Home screen 4.
F Make the scanning settings for the original.
G Press [Start].
B Press [Reset].
• Exposure Glass
(Face down)
17
16
14 13 12 11 10 9
15
☺
• Auto Document
Feeder (Face up)
How to save paper...
(Basic Copying)
A See if original is 1-sided or 2-sided (duplex).
E Enter the number of copies.
B Press [Dup./Combine/Series].
F Press [Start].
C Select the original and copy types and/or the orientation.
D Place the originals, and then press [Start].
A Select a color mode.
Duplex
→
1-Sided
2-Sided
Copies two 1-sided pages
on one 2-sided page.
How to Reduce/Enlarge...
→
2-Sided
2-Sided
Copies one 2-sided page on
one 2-sided page.
(Basic Copying)
Combine
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
A Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
B Select the paper size.
C Place the originals, and then press [Start].
1-sided Combine
Copies multiple 1-sided or
2-sided originals on one side
of copy paper.
2-sided Combine
Copies multiple 1-sided
originals on two sides of
copy paper.
Copies multiple 2-sided
originals on two sides of
copy paper.
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
A Press [Reduce / Enlarge].
B Select a ratio, and then press [OK].
C Place the originals, and then press [Start].
(Paper size is selected automatically.)
EN GB
EN US
EN AU D148-7533
8
For more functions on Document
Server, see “Document Server”, Copy/ Document Server.
D Make desired settings.
© 2013
The machine stores scanned originals in memory and makes
one set of copies.
To find your document, press the
{Home} key on the top left of the control
panel, and press the [Document Server]
icon on the screen.
7
C Place the originals.
How to select a color mode...
Why use it...
A Press [Store File].
Auto Image Density
Dark texture originals will be copied so that
background will not be reproduced.
(Color Copying)
(Basic Copying)
• To store often used documents centrally and print on demand.
• To reduce network load.
Paper Size
You can check the paper size
using the scale on the exposure glass.
How to make Copies...
Document Server
For more functions on Combine, see “Basic Copying”, Copy/
Document Server.
How to finish your document...
(Basic Copying)
Staple
A Press [Finishing].
B Press [Finisher] when the key is
displayed.
C Select one of the stapling
positions (Copies will be sorted
automatically).
D Press [OK].
E Enter the number of copies.
F Place the originals, and then
press [Start].
Punch
A Press [Finishing].
B Press [Finisher] when the key is displayed.
C Select one of the punch hole positions (Copies will be hole punched).
D Press [OK].
E Enter the number of copies.
F Place the originals, and then press [Start].
Staple and Punch can be done at the same time.
Availability of finishing depends on your configuration.
Simple Screen
When you press [Simplfied Scrn.], the screen changes to the
simple screen. Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size,
making operations easier.
Only the main functions can be used.
Advanced features
Reduce/Enlarge
• Zoom: You can specify
the reproduction ratio in
increments of 1%.
• Magnification: You can
specify the horizontal and
vertical reproduction ratios,
individually.
Series Copies
• Separately copies the
front and back of a 2-sided
original onto two sheets.
Booklet/Magazine
• Copies two or more
originals in page order.
(Basic Copying, Advanced Copying)
Edit/Stamp
• Image Repeat/Double
Copies: The original image
is copied repeatedly.
• Centering: Moves image to
the center.
• Erase: Erases the center
and/or all four sides of the
original image.
• Stamps: Copies with the
date, page numbers, etc.
Cover/Slip Sheet
• Covers: Create cover sheets.
• Designate: Copies certain
pages of the original onto
designation sheets.
Chapter references in this guide refer to the bundled OI CD; Copy/ Document Server and Paper Specifications and Adding Paper.
Quick Reference Fax Guide
cPlease
*The shape of the machine, screen displays,
procedures, and titles in references vary depending
on the machine you are using. Also, not all functions
are available on all machines.
How to send a fax...
(Transmission)
put this guide above your machineg
7. Media slots
8. {Stop} key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as
copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
9. [#] (Enter key)
10. [Start]
Press to start copying, printing,
scanning, or sending.
1. {Home} key
Press to display the [Home] screen.
2. Display panel
3. [Reset]
Press to clear the current settings.
4. Energy Saver
5. Main power indicator
6. Media access lamp
11. [C] (Clear key)
Press to delete a number entered.
12. Number keys
13. [Simplfied Scrn.]
14. [Recall/Program/Change Program]
Press to register frequently used
settings, or to recall registered settings.
15. {Check Status} key
16. Data In indicator
17. Fax indicator
18. {Menu} key
19. {Return} key
How to cancel a transmission...
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the
control panel. Flick the screen to the left, and
then press the [Fax] icon on the Home screen
4.
B Specify a transmission mode:
1
2
3
4
5
Memory + Immediate
Before the original is scanned = before pressing [Start]:
A Press [Reset] on the top right of the screen.
6
• Memory Transmission, or
While the original is being scanned
A Press the {Stop} key.
B Press [Cancel Scanning] or [Cancel TX].
• Immediate Transmission (selected by
pressing [Immed. TX])
19
C Place the original.
• Exposure glass
(face down)
Memory
After the original is scanned
A Press the {Stop} key.
B Press [Standby File List].
C Select the file you want to cancel.
D Press [Stop Transmission], and then press [OK].
E Press [Exit].
18
17
• Auto Document
Feeder (face up)
7
16 15
14
13 12 11 10
9
8
How to print the Journal...
☺
F Press [Start].
If you select Memory Transmission, you can send
to more destinations at once. To do this, after
step 5, specify destinations and press [Start].
A Press [TX/RX Status / Print].
To send to an Internet Fax,
e-mail, or folder
How to program a Destination key…
destination, press
(Registering Addresses and Users, Connecting the Machine/ System Settings)
[Internet Fax], [E-mail], or
[Folder] to switch the
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the control panel. Flick the
screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on the
Home screen 4.
transmission type.
How to fax to Document Server...
(Storing a
Document)
B Press [Address Book Mangmnt].
A Press [Store File].
C Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
B Select [Send & Store].
D Select the name whose fax destination you want to register. Press
the name key, or enter the registered number using the number
keys.
C Set the user name, file name, and password
as necessary, and then press [OK].
D Specify a destination, and then press [Start].
To send a fax from Document Server:
A Press [Select Stored File].
B Select the documents to be sent, and then
press [OK].
C Specify a destination, and then press [Start].
© 2013
EN GB
EN US
EN AU D148-7534
E Press [Fax Dest.].
F Press [Change] under Fax Destination, enter the fax number using
the number keys and press [OK].
How to send at a specific time (Send Later)
(Other Transmission
Features)
Using this function, you can instruct the machine to send the fax
at a later time via Memory Transmission.
Advantage: you can take advantage of off-peak telephone
charges, without being at the machine.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Print Journal].
C Select the printing method:
- [All]
- [Print per File No.]
- [Print per User]
D Press [Start].
E Press [Exit] twice.
Advanced Fax Features
B Press [TX Mode].
Please see Fax Operating Instructions:
C Press [Send Later].
D Enter the time using the number keys,
and then press [#].
-
SUB/SEP Codes (Other Transmission Features)
Privacy can be protected when faxing with a SUB/SEP
Code, since only people who know the SUB/SEP Code can
receive or print the fax document.
-
Printed reports (Changing/Confirming Communication
Information) Inform you if a fax has been saved, sent, or
failed to be transmitted.
-
LAN-Fax features - Sending a fax from a computer.
(Fax via Computer)
G Press [OK].
H Press [Exit].
I Press [User Tools/Counter] (
) on the top right of the screen.
(Changing/Confirming
Communication Information)
The Journal is printed automatically after every 50
communications. You can also request a Journal at any
time, by following the procedure below.
D Make the scan settings you require.
E Specify a destination.
(Transmission)
E Press [OK] twice.
Chapter references in this guide refer to the bundled OI CD; Fax and Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
Quick Reference Scanner Guide
cPlease
put this guide above your machineg
How to save to the machine’s hard disk...
*The shape of the machine, screen displays,
procedures, and titles in references vary depending
on the machine you are using. Also, not all functions
are available on all machines.
1. {Home} key
Press to display the [Home] screen.
2. Display panel
3. [Reset]
Press to clear the current settings.
4. Energy Saver
5. Main power indicator
6. Media access lamp
7. Media slots
8. {Stop} key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as
copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
9. [#] (Enter key)
10.[Start]
Press to start copying, printing,
scanning, or sending.
11.[C] (Clear key)
Press to delete a number entered.
12.Number keys
13.[Simplfied Scrn.
14.[Recall/Program/Change Program]
Press to register frequently used
settings, or to recall registered settings.
15.{Check Status} key
16.{Menu} key
17.{Return} key
(Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents)
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the control panel.
Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Scanner]
icon on the Home screen 4.
B Press [Reset].
C Place originals.
D Press [Store File].
1
To use the scanner functions, several
settings must be made beforehand.
For details about these settings,
see “Accessing User Tools”,
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings on the supplied CD-ROM.
2
3
4
E Press [Store to HDD].
5
F If necessary, specify file in ormation, such as [User Name],
[File Name], [Password], and [Select Folder].
6
For details about saving to memory storage device, see
“Storing the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory
Device or SD Card”, Scan on the supplied CD-ROM.
16
Available scan functions:
A Scan to E-mail
7
B Scan to Folder (SMB/FTP/NCP)
C Scan Using WSD (Web Services on Devices)
15
13 12 11 10
14
9
8
3. (3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function) (3. Storing Files
E Save to Memory Storage Device
G Scan via TWAIN Driver
For details about C, E, F, and G, see Scan on
the supplied CD-ROM.
How to use Scan to E-mail/
Scan to Folder...
(Sending Scanned Documents
to a Client Computer)
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the control panel.
Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Scanner]
icon on the Home screen 4.
B Press [Reset].
C Press the [E-mail] or [Folder] tab.
E If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the
original to be scanned.
B Press [Select Stored File].
C Specify the folder where the file is stored
The list of stored files is displ yed.
Registering an
E-mail destination...
F If necessary, press [Send File Type / Name] to specify
settings such as file name and file ormat.
H For scan to e-mail only
Specify the e-mail sender.
D Place originals.
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the control panel.
Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Scanner]
icon on the Home screen 4.

G Specify the destination(s). You can specify multiple
destinations.
�
For scan to e-mail:
Before you select destination(s), make sure you have
selected [To]. If necessary, press [Cc] or [Bcc], and then
select destination(s).
Depending on the security settings, the logged-in user may
be specified as [Sender Name]
EN GB
EN US
EN AU D148-7535
(Registering Addresses and Users,
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings)
A Press the {Home} key on the top left of the control panel.
Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools]
icon ( ) on the Home screen 4.
B Press [Address Book Mangmnt].
• To specify the e-mail sender, press [Sender Name].
• Select a sender.
• Press [OK].
• For reception confi mation e-mail, press [Recept. Notice].
I For scan to e-mail only
Enter a subject line if necessary.
• Press [Subject].
• Enter the subject.
• Press [OK].
J Press [Start].
© 2013
Why use it?
To store scanned files in the hard disk of the machine or
later (shared) use. (See Scan.)
Displaying
list of
files (3.
store
Using the a
Scanner
Function)
Storing (Storing
Files Using
Scanner
andthe
Saving
the
Function) (3.
Storing
Files Using the
Scanner
Function)
on the machine’s
hard
disk
Scanned
Documents)
D Store to Hard Disk
F Scan to Delivery Server
H If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner
settings such as resolution and scan size.
I Press [Start].
17
How to scan...
G Press [OK].
C Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
D Select the name whose e-mail address you want to register.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using
the number keys.
E Press [E-mail].
F Press [Change] under “E-mail Address”.
G Enter the e-mail address.
H Press [OK].
For details about registering folders, see “Registering Addresses
and Users”, Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
Chapter references in this guide refer to the bundled OI CD; Scan and Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
For Users of This Product
Thank you for purchasing this product.
This product is equipped with a Wireless LAN function. The wireless LAN function is
disabled as a factory default.
This document describes precautions about using the product's wireless LAN function. Be
sure to read this document before using the product, and keep it safe for future reference.
Be sure to read this document before using the wireless LAN function.
The product uses the 2.4 GHz frequency range for communication. Communications using radio
waves may be interrupted by noise or interference. If you want to use this product for external
communication, please be aware that communication failures may occur.
••
It is prohibited by law to disassemble or modify this product. The company takes no
responsibility for illegal modifications that are made to the wireless LAN module of this
product.
The company takes no responsibility for financial losses, such as damages incurred due to
communication failures, arising from failures, malfunctions, or defects of the wireless LAN
function, or arising from the operating environment, communication failures, power outages,
or other external factors.
No measures to prevent or block data tampering are available for devices that use radio
waves for communication. The company takes no responsibility for security problems arising
due to wireless LAN specifications or other conditions.
••
••
••
The frequency range used by this product may also be used by other products (industrial,
scientific, or medical devices) manufactured by other companies. The outdoor use of wireless
devices may be restricted. Pay attention to where you use this function.
To export this product, conform with the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act, the
Export Administration Regulations, and other related laws and regulations, and conduct the
necessary proceedings specified by them.
This function's SSID is not configured as a factory default. If you want to use SSID, you must
configure the SSID setting yourself.
Some applications of this product use the wireless LAN function. Depending on the
environment where you use the wireless LAN function, communication may be interrupted
due to radio wave interference.
Usable frequencies vary depending on the access point you use.
The wireless LAN function is disabled as a factory default. To use the applications of this
product that use the wireless LAN function, you need to enable the wireless LAN function.
••
••
••
••
••
r To service representatives (in the case of installation by service representatives only):
Give this document to the user when the installation of this product is complete.
© 2013
Printed in Japan
EN US EN GB
EN AU D150-1462
IMPORTANT NOTICE
To support the Smart Operation Panel M3, the System Firmware was modified. For a
list of supported firmware, see the “Target firmware” table below. Make sure the
firmware has been updated to the following versions or later. When there are older FW's
than the table, update them with the provided SD card named below before installing
the Smart Operation Panel M3.
<Target firmware version>
Program
Version
MP C3003/3503
MP C4503/C5503/C6003
System/Copy
2.17
D1465550C
D1485550C
SubSystem
F.17
D1465554
D1485554
FAX
02.12.00
D1465557C
D1485557C
RemoteFAX
02.10.00
D1465558B
D1485558B
Scanner
02.11
D1465560B
D1485560B
Web Support
2.00
D1465561B
D1485561B
Web Uapl
2.00
D1465562B
D1485562B
Network Support 12.72.3
D1465567B
D1485567B
NetworkDocBox
2.01
D1465568A
D1485568A
Printer
2.03
D1465570B
D1485570B
©2013
Printed in Japan
D150-1430
Notes for Security Guide
If security settings are not made, there is a risk of damage resulting from
malicious activity. For this reason, be sure to make the security settings
shown in Security Guide.
This document describes how to read Security Guide on the
Smart Operation Panel. The administrator should keep this
document in a safe place.
Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power
switch.
The main power indicator lights up and the power turns on.
Press the [Home] key on the top left of the control panel, and press
the [Screen Browser] icon on the [Home] screen.
Press the address bar.
Enter "http://support-download.com/services/device/webhlp/p_manual/
europe/MPC6003/en/security/int/index.htm", and then press [Go].
Security Guide is displayed.
• For details about how to turn on the machine, see "Turning On/Off the Power",
Getting Started.
• For details about how to use the Screen Browser function, see "Using the
Browser Function (When Using the Smart Operation Panel)", Convenient
Functions.
© 2013
Printed in France
EN GB D146-7569